Vue normale

Il y a de nouveaux articles disponibles, cliquez pour rafraîchir la page.
À partir d’avant-hierFlux principal

Jonsbo N2 vs Jonsbo N3 vs Jonsbo N4 – Which NAS Case Is Best?

Par : Rob Andrews
12 avril 2024 à 15:00

Should You Buy the Jonsbo N4, N3 or N2 for your NAS DiY Build?

Building your NAS has inarguably become easier in recent years, thanks in large part to considerably more tailored and NAS-designed components arriving on the market that allow users to take a lot of the guesswork out of building a private cloud and network server from scratch. Although a lot of improvements and innovations have occurred in power-efficient SoC/Mobile CPUs and the miniaturization of technology, when it comes to actual NAS enclosures/cases – it’s actually a much less populated market than you might think. NAS cases are not really the same as traditional PC cases – designed with a greater focus on storage capabilities, hot swapping storage when needed, engineered for 24×7 use and designed to house the NAS-focused CPU+MoBo combos that have rolled out from brands such as ASrock, Topton, CWWK, Minisforum and more. Indeed, arguably one of the most popular brand’s in the market for NAS enclosures is Jonsbo, with its growing range of NAS-designed enclosures. Now that its fourth iteration has rolled out, the Jonsbo N4, I thought it time to find out what the main differences are between their three most popular NAS cases right now, the Jonsbo N2, N3 and N4. Each one has its strengths and weaknesses, ranging from scalability and day 1 storage, to motherboard compatibility and cooling systems. So, let’s compare the Jonsbo N4 vs N3 vs N2 and help you decide which one is best for you and your data!

USEFUL RESOURCES:

Here are links to the previous full reviews of the Jonsbo N2, N3 and N4 NAS Cases:

N2

Best for Low/Efficient NAS Deployment

Lowest Price Point

Smallest Physical Footprint

Smallest Storage Capacity

Only 1 PCIe Card Slot and Half Height

N3

Best for  a Power NAS Build + Bigger CPU Cooling

Largest Storage Capacity + Full Size PCIe Cards

Best Prosumer Deployment

BIG Size and oddly tall

Noisiest System of the Three

N4

Better MoBo Compatibility (MITX and MATX)

Best Size vs Storage Option + 4x PCIe Slots

Most Conventially Aesthetically Appealing

Most Expensive

PCIe Cards Must Be Half Height

======= Where To Buy? =======
$76 (Check Aliexpress HERE) $99.42 (Check Aliexpress HERE) $76.99 (Check Aliexpress HERE)
$149 (Check Amazon HERE) $170 (Check Amazon HERE) $199* (Check Amazon HERE)

Jonsbo N2 vs N3 vs N4 – The TLDR

The Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 NAS Enclosures cater to an interesting range of storage and cooling needs for DiY NAS builders, which is most likely the reason that Jonsbo has become so popular with home lab’ers and server enthusiasts. First up, the N2, with its compact footprint, is designed around the ITX motherboard form factor, accommodating up to 5 3.5″ HDDs for storage. Its built-in 120mm fan ensures efficient cooling within a tightly packed space, while the design accommodates a maximum CPU cooler height of 65mm, emphasizing its focus on compact, yet powerful builds. The N3 expands on these capabilities, offering support for up to 8 3.5″ HDDs, thereby increasing the potential storage capacity significantly. Despite its larger size, it retains support for ITX motherboards only but allows for a taller CPU cooler (up to 130mm), addressing the needs of users requiring more robust cooling solutions and storage within a still compact NAS solution.

The N4 model diverges notably in terms of design and compatibility, embracing a more eclectic mix of materials with its steel and wood construction. This enclosure is compatible with both ITX and M-ATX motherboards, broadening its appeal to users with varying motherboard preferences. It supports up to 6 3.5″ HDDs, positioning it between the N2 and N3 in terms of storage capacity but makes a distinct statement with its unique material choice and aesthetic. The N4 also supports a slightly larger CPU cooler height than the N2, up to 70mm, but less than the N3, balancing between compact design and cooling efficiency. Its cooling strategy is centered around a single built-in 120mm fan, ensuring that despite its capacity for larger motherboards, thermal management remains a priority. Through these nuanced differences in storage capacity, motherboard support, CPU cooler height, and cooling strategies, the Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 enclosures offer tailored solutions for a range of user requirements, from compact, efficient setups to more expansive, versatile builds.

Jonsbo N3 vs N2 vs N4 – NAS Size and Physical Footprint

The Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 NAS cases exhibit a thoughtful progression in physical size to accommodate varying user needs and preferences. The N2, the most compact of the trio, measures 222.5mm in width and depth, standing 224mm tall. This square-like dimension underscores its design for efficiency and minimal spatial footprint, ideal for users seeking a space-saving solution without compromising on storage capacity, with room for up to five 3.5″ HDDs. In contrast, the N3 slightly expands on this design philosophy, with dimensions of 233mm by 262mm by 298mm (WxDxH), thereby offering a larger internal volume. This additional space is leveraged to support up to eight 3.5″ HDDs, catering to users with greater storage needs while still maintaining a relatively compact form factor suitable for small office or home environments.

Model Dimensions (WxDxH) mm Max. CPU Cooler Height (mm) Cooling System Ventilation
N2 222.5 x 222.5 x 224 65 120x15mm fan *1 (built-in) Side panels, top, rear
N3 233 x 262 x 298 130 100x25mm *2 (optional), 80x25mm *2 (built-in) Side, back, ventilated front panel
N4 286 x 300 x 228 70 120mm *1 (built-in) Side panels, top, rear, wooden front panel

Moving further up in size, the N4 distinguishes itself with dimensions of 286mm by 300mm by 228mm (WxDxH), making it the widest and deepest, yet not the tallest among the three. This layout is indicative of its design to accommodate both ITX and M-ATX motherboards, providing flexibility for users who may require more expansive motherboard support. The increased width and depth also facilitate an enhanced cooling solution and additional drive bays, accommodating up to six 3.5″ HDDs. Despite its larger size relative to the N2 and N3, the N4’s design remains conscious of space efficiency, striking a balance between accommodating more powerful hardware and maintaining a form factor that is still manageable within a variety of settings. This gradation in size across the Jonsbo NAS case lineup reflects a deliberate approach to meet diverse user requirements, from the most space-conscious to those needing a broader scope of hardware support and cooling efficiency.

Jonsbo N2 vs N4 vs N2 – Storage Capacity

The storage capacity of the Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 NAS cases varies to cater to different user demands, reflecting a clear gradation in terms of available drive bays for HDDs and SSDs. The N2 offers the starting point with room for one 2.5″ SSD and five 3.5″ HDDs, presenting a balanced option for moderate storage needs within a compact frame. Stepping up, the N3 enhances this capability significantly, accommodating one 2.5″ SSD and eight 3.5″ HDDs, thus positioning itself as a more suitable option for users requiring higher data storage capacity in a still relatively compact NAS solution.

Model 2.5″ SSD Bays 3.5″ HDD Bays Motherboard Compatibility Max. CPU Cooler Height (mm) PCI Expansion Slots
N2 1 5 ITX 65 1
N3 1 8 ITX 130 2
N4 2 6 ITX / M-ATX 70 4

The N4, while providing support for two 2.5″ SSDs and six 3.5″ HDDs, offers a middle ground in terms of storage capacity; it supports slightly more SSD storage than the N2 and N3 but has fewer bays for HDDs compared to the N3. This structured variation in storage capacity across the Jonsbo lineup ensures that users can select a case that best matches their specific storage requirements, from basic setups to more demanding data accumulation needs.

HOWEVER, keep in mind that only the first 4 bays of the Jonsbo N4 NAS Case support hotswapping, as the 2x 3.5″ (bay 5 and 6) and the 2x 2.5″ SATA SSD bays (bay 7 and 8) do NOT support any kind of backplane ou-the-box and require separate cabling for the individual SATA and SATA-POWER connectors. This was a very odd choice by the brand, and we cover this in more detail HERE in the written review of the N4 and HERE in the video review.

Jonsbo N3 vs N2 vs N4 – Motherboard, PCIe and Cooler Support

The Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 cases offer varied motherboard support to cater to different preferences and needs, with a particular focus on ITX form factors but with some variation in support that reflects their differing designs and intended use cases. The N2 and N3 are specifically designed for ITX motherboards, aligning with their emphasis on compact, efficient space usage while providing robust storage solutions within their size constraints. This singular focus on ITX boards in the N2 and N3 cases is ideal for users looking for NAS solutions that prioritize space-saving without sacrificing performance. The ITX form factor’s compact size allows these cases to maintain a smaller footprint, making them suitable for environments where space is at a premium.

Jonsbo N2 and N3 Motherboard Cavity

In contrast, the N4 expands its compatibility to include both ITX and M-ATX motherboards, offering greater flexibility and accommodating a broader range of user requirements. This dual compatibility allows for more significant expansion and upgrade possibilities, catering to users who may seek additional performance or connectivity options that M-ATX motherboards can provide.

The Jonsbo N4 Motherboard Cavity

The M-ATX support in the N4 not only broadens the potential use cases for the case but also makes it a more versatile choice for users who may want to repurpose or upgrade their system in the future without being constrained by the smaller ITX form factor.

Model Motherboard Type PCIe Expansion Slots Max. Number of PCIe Cards Max. PCIe Card Height Max. PCIe Card Width Max. CPU Cooler Height (mm)
N2 ITX 1 1 (Low profile) Low profile Single slot 65
N3 ITX 2 2 Standard Up to 2 slots 130
N4 ITX / M-ATX 4 4 Standard Up to 2 slots 70

The consideration of CPU cooler space and PCIe expansion slots further differentiates these cases. The N2 and N3 allow for CPU coolers up to 65mm and 130mm in height, respectively, reflecting their different design priorities and internal space allocations. The N4, while providing for CPU coolers up to 70mm in height, notably offers support for up to four PCIe expansion slots due to its M-ATX compatibility. This added expansion capability is a significant advantage for users looking to install additional graphics cards, network cards, or other PCIe devices, enhancing the system’s overall versatility and performance potential. The increased space and flexibility in the N4 make it an appealing option for users who prioritize expandability and upgradeability in their NAS or PC builds, offering a balance between compact design and the enhanced utility afforded by the M-ATX form factor.

Jonsbo N3 vs N2 vs N4 – Cooling and Ventilation

The cooling and ventilation strategies employed by the Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 cases are critical to their design, influencing not only their thermal management capabilities but also their aesthetic appeal and functionality. The N2 case features ventilation on the side panels, a considerable vent panel on the top, and additional venting on the rear, facilitating multidirectional airflow that supports effective heat dissipation from internal components. This arrangement is particularly advantageous for maintaining optimal operating temperatures within the compact confines of the case, ensuring that even when fully loaded with storage drives, airflow remains unimpeded. The inclusion of a large top vent is noteworthy, as it capitalizes on the natural rise of hot air, thereby enhancing the cooling efficiency without the need for excessive fan use, which can be beneficial for users seeking a quieter operation.

Jonsbo N2 NAS Case

The N3, on the other hand, extends the ventilation scheme to include vents on the sides, back, and notably, a ventilated front panel. This comprehensive approach to airflow management ensures that cool air can be drawn in from the front and expelled through the side and rear vents, creating a constant flow of air through the chassis. The ventilated front panel not only contributes to the cooling efficiency but also adds to the case’s visual identity, merging functional design with aesthetic considerations. The ability to intake air from the front is particularly beneficial for systems with multiple drives, as it helps to mitigate heat buildup around the storage bays, maintaining optimal performance of the drives and other internal components.

The N4 case adopts a similar ventilation strategy to the N2, with vents on the side panels, a large top vent, and rear ventilation, ensuring ample airflow through the case. However, it distinguishes itself with a wooden front panel that covers half of the front, adding a unique aesthetic touch while still allowing for air intake through the lower half of the front panel. This design choice strikes a balance between form and function, offering effective cooling by combining the benefits of the N2’s ventilation pattern with a stylistic differentiation. The wooden panel adds a touch of elegance and natural texture to the case, setting it apart visually from many other NAS and PC cases on the market, without compromising on the thermal management aspect.

Across all three models, the use of rubber pull handles on the drive bays instead of trays not only simplifies the installation and removal process but also reduces vibration transmission, contributing to quieter operation. This design choice reflects a thoughtful consideration of usability and noise reduction, further enhancing the user experience.

Jonsbo N3 vs N2 vs N4 – Conclusion and Verdict, Which Should You Choose?

The Jonsbo N2, N3, and N4 NAS cases offer a diverse range of options catering to various user needs, from compact, efficient storage solutions to more versatile systems that allow for significant expansion and customization. The N2 stands out for its compact design and efficient use of space, making it ideal for users seeking a minimal footprint without sacrificing storage capability. Its focused cooling strategy ensures that it remains suitable for environments where noise levels and space are critical considerations. The N3, with its expanded storage capacity and comprehensive ventilation system, caters to users requiring more extensive data storage without venturing into the realm of bulkier, less aesthetically pleasing solutions. Its design balances the need for increased storage with effective thermal management, making it a compelling option for power users in need of a compact yet capable NAS case. On the other hand, the N4 broadens the horizon with its support for both ITX and M-ATX motherboards, offering a bridge between compact NAS solutions and more expansive PC builds. Its unique aesthetic, highlighted by the wooden front panel, adds a touch of sophistication, distinguishing it from typical NAS and PC cases. The N4’s design flexibility, coupled with effective cooling and ventilation, positions it as a versatile choice for users who prioritize both form and function. Across the board, Jonsbo’s NAS cases reflect a commitment to quality, innovation, and user-focused design. Whether prioritizing compactness, storage capacity, or flexibility in motherboard support, users are provided with thoughtfully designed options that do not compromise on performance or aesthetic appeal, making the N2, N3, and N4 standout choices in their respective categories.

N2

Best for Low/Efficient NAS Deployment

Lowest Price Point

Smallest Physical Footprint

Smallest Storage Capacity

Only 1 PCIe Card Slot and Half Height

N3

Best for  a Power NAS Build + Bigger CPU Cooling

Largest Storage Capacity + Full Size PCIe Cards

Best Prosumer Deployment

BIG Size and oddly tall

Noisiest System of the Three

N4

Better MoBo Compatibility (MITX and MATX)

Best Size vs Storage Option + 4x PCIe Slots

Most Conventially Aesthetically Appealing

Most Expensive

PCIe Cards Must Be Half Height

======= Where To Buy? =======
$76 (Check Aliexpress HERE) $99.42 (Check Aliexpress HERE) $76.99 (Check Aliexpress HERE)
$149 (Check Amazon HERE) $170 (Check Amazon HERE) $199* (Check Amazon HERE)

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

D-Link NAS Hard-Coded Credential Security Vulnerability Discovered – DISCONNECT FROM THE INTERNET NOW

Par : Rob Andrews
10 avril 2024 à 15:00

Severe D-Link Security Vulnerability Discovered – CVE-2024-3273 and CVE-2024-3274 Hard-Coded Credential Backdoor

The cybersecurity landscape has been significantly impacted by the discovery of two vulnerabilities in D-Link NAS devices, designated as CVE-2024-3273 and CVE-2024-3274. These vulnerabilities affect multiple (approx 92,000 internet facing devices, the bulk of which are UK based) D-Link NAS models that are no longer supported by the manufacturer due to their end-of-life (EOL) status. This detailed analysis aims to unpack the complexities of these vulnerabilities, their operational implications, and the necessary user responses.

Impact and Affected D-Link NAS Model:

The confirmed list of affected D-Link NAS models includes:

Model Region Hardware Revision End of Service Life
Fixed Firmware Conclusion Last Updated
DNS-320L All Regions All H/W Revisions 05/31/2020  Not Available Retire & Replace Device
04/01/2024
DNS-325 All Regions All H/W Revisions 09/01/2017 Not Available Retire & Replace Device 04/01/2024
DNS-327L All Regions All H/W Revisions 05/31/2020 Not Available Retire & Replace Device 04/01/2024
DNS-340L All Regions All H/W Revisions 07/31/2019 Not Available Retire & Replace Device 04/01/2024

These devices, pivotal in small office/home office (SOHO) environments for data storage and management, are now susceptible to remote attacks that could compromise sensitive data integrity, availability, and confidentiality.

CVE-2024-3273: Command Injection Vulnerability Explained

CVE-2024-3273 exposes a command injection flaw within the web interface of affected D-Link NAS devices. The vulnerability is located in the handling of the system parameter within the nas_sharing.cgi script, which improperly sanitizes user-supplied input. This oversight allows authenticated remote attackers to inject and execute arbitrary shell commands encoded in base64. The execution context of these commands is particularly concerning, as it typically runs under the web server’s privileges, potentially leading to unauthorized access to the system, modification of system settings, or initiation of a denial of service (DoS) attack.

Technical Dive into CVE-2024-3274: Hardcoded Credentials

CVE-2024-3274 reveals a hardcoded credential vulnerability, manifesting as a backdoor account (messagebus) embedded within the device firmware. This account, notably lacking a password, permits unauthenticated remote access to the device’s administrative interface. The presence of such hardcoded credentials significantly lowers the complexity of unauthorized device access, making it a critical vulnerability. This backdoor could be exploited in tandem with CVE-2024-3273 to elevate privileges or gain persistent access to the compromised device.

Who Found the D-Link Vulnerability?

The vulnerabilities were disclosed by a security researcher operating under the pseudonym “netsecfish,” who provided detailed technical insights and proof-of-concept (PoC) code. This disclosure highlighted the risk of widespread exploitation, given the estimated 92,000 devices exposed online across various regions, including the UK, Thailand, Italy, and Germany. The timing of the disclosure, subsequent to the affected models reaching their EOL, exacerbated concerns around feasible mitigation strategies.

You can find the full and very detailed outlining of the Vulnerability and Potential attack vector HERE on Netsecfish’s github listing

Mitigation Strategies for Users Who Are Still Using A D-LInk NAS

In light of D-Link’s stance on not providing firmware updates for EOL products, affected users are faced with limited mitigation options. The primary recommendation is the retirement and replacement of vulnerable devices. Interim measures, for those unable to immediately replace their devices, include isolating the NAS devices from the internet, implementing strict network segmentation, and employing firewall rules to restrict access to the management interface. Additionally, monitoring for unusual network activity can provide early detection of exploitation attempts.

D-Link Official Response

D-Link has acknowledged the vulnerabilities but emphasized the EOL status of the affected models, which precludes official firmware updates or patches. The company has issued advisories urging users to replace outdated devices with supported models. This situation underscores the importance of adhering to device lifecycle policies and maintaining an updated infrastructure to mitigate security risks.

You can see the full official D-Link Response HERE

At the time of writing, there is no mention of this on their social media pages. Hopefully this changes, as the potential 82,000 internet facing units in the wild need to be addressed.

Exploitation in the Wild of the hard-code credential D-Link Vulnerability

GreyNoise, a cybersecurity firm specializing in analyzing internet-wide scan traffic to identify threats, has provided valuable insights into the exploitation attempts of the D-Link NAS vulnerabilities. According to their analysis, a significant uptick in scan activity targeting the specific vulnerabilities CVE-2024-3273 and CVE-2024-3274 was observed shortly after their disclosure. This activity suggests that attackers are actively seeking out vulnerable D-Link NAS devices for exploitation. GreyNoise’s findings indicate that the exploitation attempts are not isolated incidents but part of a broader effort by malicious actors to identify and compromise affected devices. The data collected by GreyNoise highlights the real-world implications of these vulnerabilities and serves as a critical alert for organizations and individuals to take immediate protective actions against potential unauthorized access and exploitation of their D-Link NAS devices.

You can learn more about this on Greynoise’s official page on this matter HERE

The D-Link NAS Series is Still For Sale (Technically)

Despite the end-of-life status and known vulnerabilities of D-Link NAS models DNS-340L, DNS-320L, DNS-327L, and DNS-325, these devices continue to find a marketplace on platforms such as eBay and other online resale venues. This ongoing sale of used units poses a significant cybersecurity risk, as many sellers and buyers may not be fully aware of the devices’ vulnerability to exploits. Alarmingly, at the time of writing, it is reported that over 80,000 of these units remain actively internet-facing, directly exposing them to potential exploitation by attackers leveraging the CVE-2024-3273 and CVE-2024-3274 vulnerabilities. The persistence of these devices in active operational environments underscores the critical need for heightened awareness and proactive measures among current users. Potential buyers should be cautioned against acquiring these models, and existing users are strongly advised to consider secure alternatives that receive current manufacturer support and updates, mitigating the risk of compromise.

I own a Synology/QNAP NAS, Should I Care? How to Automatically Get Updated When Synology and QNAP NAS Vulnerabilities are Reported

Pretty much ALL of the brands in NAS, Data Storage and Cloud services have these security advisory pages, but the idea of checking these pages manually (i.e. bookmark etc) every day, week or month is too much of a hassle for many. On the other hand, they all arrive with an RSS feed link that allows users to subscribe to updates BUT many users are not even aware of how to apply an RSS feed (it’s a complex XML feed of text that needs to be injected into an appropriate RSS feed client/agent – so yeah, hardly noob friendly). So, in order to make this 1000x easier, I have (and by me, I mean Eddie the Web Guy spent time on it and I made this article!) made this page that will be constantly updated with the latest vulnerabilities reported on the popular NAS brands and storage-related manufacturers. It is still being built (so more brands are being added) but it will allow you to just chuck your email address below (will not be used for profit or spamming etc) and then you will get an alter EVERY TIME a new security vulnerability is updated by the brands (this is automated, so it will appear here as soon as it appears on the respective security advisory page). Additionally, there will be links back to the brand/manufacturer site so you can find out more about individual exploits and vulnerabilities, how they work, what they do and (most importantly) give you a better idea of whether you should update your NAS/Storage system or not. I hope you find it helpful and if you have any recommendations or idea of what we should add to this page/service to make it even better – let us know in the comments or directing here – https://nascompares.com/contact-us

Sign Up Below to Get Updates as New Vulnerabilities Are Reported


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

Find an updated vulnerability list here:

Comprehensive User Recommendations

Beyond immediate mitigation, users should consider several best practices for network device security:

  • Conduct regular security audits of network devices.
  • Update all devices to the latest firmware versions where possible.
  • Employ network firewalls and intrusion detection systems to monitor and control inbound and outbound traffic.
  • Practice the principle of least privilege by restricting device access to necessary personnel.

Conclusion

The vulnerabilities identified as CVE-2024-3273 and CVE-2024-3274 in D-Link NAS devices present significant security challenges. The absence of official firmware updates for these EOL products necessitates proactive user measures to mitigate risks. This analysis serves as a call to action for users to evaluate their network security posture critically, implement robust security measures, and ensure that all network-attached storage devices operate within their supported lifecycle.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Terramaster Release TOS 6 (Beta) – What’s New?

Par : Rob Andrews
8 avril 2024 à 18:00

Terramaster NAS Release TOS 6 in Beta

The release of Terramaster TOS 6 Beta for NAS devices marks a significant milestone in the evolution of NAS operating systems, with an array of new features and comprehensive improvements designed to enhance user experience, system performance, and security. This sixth iteration introduces a radically redesigned user interface and integrates more than 40 new functionalities while refining over 370 aspects, ensuring a top-tier upgrade for TNAS users.

Expanded Key Features and Improvements in TOS 6

  • Linux Kernel 6.1 LTS Upgrade: Transitioning to the latest Linux kernel version, TOS 6 benefits from improved scheduling algorithms, enhanced memory management, superior file system support, optimized network performance, advanced security features, and better power management. This upgrade facilitates a more robust and efficient system, capable of handling the demands of both home and enterprise environments with ease.

  • Revolutionized Docker Manager 2.0.16: This release introduces Docker Compose project management, adding a new dimension to container orchestration on TNAS devices. The addition of a container terminal and system notifications for Docker image operations streamlines container management. These enhancements, combined with UI and functionality optimizations, cater to developers and IT professionals seeking a versatile platform for containerized applications.

  • File Manager Overhaul: With user feedback and industry best practices in mind, the File Manager has been retooled to offer an intuitive, efficient file navigation and management experience. Features such as enhanced directory navigation, column display mode for deep folder hierarchy exploration, tabbed browsing, adjustable thumbnail sizes, and a suite of new file operation tools significantly elevate user productivity.

  • Online Disk Wiping: This new utility offers a straightforward solution for securely erasing all data from disks directly within the TOS interface, facilitating easy preparation of drives for repurposing or disposal without the need for external tools.
  • Cloud Drive Mounting: Seamlessly integrate cloud storage services such as Google Drive, Dropbox, and more directly into TNAS. This feature enhances the flexibility of data access and management, allowing for efficient data synchronization and sharing between local and cloud storage.

  • Security and Privacy Control (SPC): Introducing a robust security framework designed to prevent unauthorized execution of programs on TNAS devices. SPC enhances the overall security posture by ensuring only vetted and authorized applications can run, significantly reducing the risk of malware and ransomware infections.

  • SMB Multichannel Support: By enabling multiple network connections for SMB file sharing, TOS 6 ensures higher data transfer speeds, improved reliability, and enhanced redundancy. This feature is particularly beneficial in multi-user environments where network performance directly impacts productivity.
  • Direct Data Drive Mounting: Offering unparalleled convenience, this feature allows users to access data on external drives without the need for disk reformatting or repartitioning, preserving existing data while extending the storage capabilities of TNAS devices.
  • Storage Pool Migration: Streamlines the process of migrating storage pools between TNAS devices, aiding users in hardware upgrades or replacements without the hassle of data migration or system reconfiguration.
  • Advanced ACL Permissions: Delivers granular access control with 13 additional customizable permissions on top of the standard read, write, and deny options. This advanced permission management system enables precise control over data access, ensuring data security and compliance.

TOS 6 Beta System Enhancements

TOS 6 introduces a slew of system-wide enhancements aimed at delivering a more stable, secure, and user-friendly NAS operating environment:

  • Performance and Stability: With the new Linux kernel and system optimizations, TOS 6 offers improved system stability and performance, ensuring that TNAS devices can handle intensive tasks and larger volumes of data more efficiently.
  • Hardware and Innovation Support: Prepared for the future, TOS 6 includes support for the latest hardware innovations, such as Intel’s “Meteor Lake” chips, and introduces new data structures and error decoding capabilities for enhanced data processing and system reliability.
  • Enhanced Security Measures: Building upon TerraMaster’s commitment to security, new features like customizable HTTPS certificates, optimized firewall rule settings, and the innovative SPC module significantly enhance the protection of user data against external threats.
  • User Interface and Usability Improvements: From a streamlined desktop design and simplified navigation to a new “Start” menu and customizable user avatars, TOS 6 focuses on creating a more engaging and personalized user experience.
  • Comprehensive Application and Service Enhancements: The update enriches the application ecosystem with new functionalities, improved file services, and advanced storage features, catering to a wide range of user needs from media indexing and scheduled task notifications to cross-platform data interoperability and USB storage device health management.

Through these extensive features and improvements, TOS 6 Beta not only advances the capabilities of TNAS devices but also sets a new standard for NAS operating systems, offering a sophisticated platform for storage, management, and security that meets the evolving needs of both individual and enterprise users.

How To Access the TOS 6 Beta – Update Instructions

Applicable models:
F2-221, F2-223, F2-422, F2-423, F2-424
F4-221, F4-223, F4-421, F4-422, F4-423, F4-424, F4-424 Pro, U4-111, U4-423
F5-221, F5-421, F5-422
T6-423
F8-421, F8-422, U8-111, U8-420, U8-423, U8-450, U8-322-9100, U8-522-9400, U8-722-2224
T9-423, T9-450
T12-423, T12-450, U12-423, U12-322-9100, U12-722-2224
U16-322-9100, U16-722-2224, U16-722-2288
U24-612, U24-722-2224

Applicable TOS Versions:
TOS 5.1.123 or later versions; if your device does not meet the update requirements, please do not update! Otherwise, system crashes may occur.

Precautions:
1. The Beta version is an early version of the program, containing most major functions but not yet completed, and may have some defects. This version is only released to specific groups or the general public for testing and feedback collection; the Beta version should not be used in work or production environments. If your TNAS device is running business operations or storing important data, please refrain from participating in this test.
2. Updating the system theoretically will not affect the data on your hard drive, but for safety reasons, please be sure to back up your data in advance.
3. After the update, if applications such as Plex, Emby, Aria2, etc., need to access new shared folders, you will need to reconfigure application user permissions.
4. Previously created firewall rules will be cleared, and you will need to create new firewall rules after the update.
5. If you are using port 5444, you will need to modify this port before updating.
6. After the update, TNAS will exit the domain, and you will need to rejoin the domain and refresh domain users.
7. After the update, if your encrypted shared file key contains special characters, you can only mount it by entering the key.
8. System configuration backups from TOS 5 cannot be restored to TOS 6.
9. Hyper Cache created before the update will become invalid after the update; it is recommended to uninstall Hyper Cache before updating.
10. Docker Manager versions 1.1.99 or earlier cannot run on TOS 6; please update Docker Manager before updating the system.

How to Update to TOS 6 Beta on Your Terramaster NAS?

1. Download the TOS 6 Beta update package: TOS 6 (md5:821b697ddb27dbc9c95ce2be398c791b)
2. Go to TOS > Control Panel > General Settings > System;
3. Under “Manual Update”, upload the update package;
4. Click “Apply”;
5. After the system update is complete, you will need to refresh your browser;
6. Your TNAS IP address may change after the system update. If you are unable to connect to your TNAS using the previous IP address, please use the TNAS PC client to search for the new IP address again.

Other Software Downloads:
TNAS PC for Windows OS: https://tos-downloads.oss-cn-hongkong.a … .1.352.exe
TNAS PC for macOS: https://download2.terra-master.com/TNAS … versal.dmg
TNAS Mobile for Android:https://download2.terra-master.com/TNAS … 3.2.31.apk
TNAS Mobile for iOS: Download from the iOS App Store.📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

UGREEN NASync DXP480T NAS Review

Par : Rob Andrews
5 avril 2024 à 15:00

UGREEN DXP480T NASync SSD NAS Review

What exactly IS the DXP480T? Ever since UGREEN launched their NASync range of NAS devices on Kickstarter, there has been a lot of interest in this computer accessories and peripheral company making its big move into Network Attached Storage. No doubt hoping to challenge this market’s leaders Synology and QNAP, UGREEN have revealed a 6 system series (the DXP range) and although the first 5 of them are interesting enough, it is the compact yet powerful NVMe Flash-equipped NASync DXP480T that has drawn many a hungry I.T user’s eye! Arriving with a 10 Core Intel i5 Processor, DDR5 memory, PCIe Gen 4 Architecture, 4x m.2 2280 NVMe SSD bays, 10GbE networking, Thunderbolt 4 ports and Wifi 6E connectivity – There is ALOT crammed into this tiny little box! Add to this the ‘still in development’ UGOS NAS software that is included with the system and the $479-519 price tag for early access on Kickstarter (going up to $799 RRP when it hits ACTUAL retail) and what you have here is a fantastic proposition for photo and video editors that are looking for a small footprint, low noise, but high-performance private server. But is it too good to be true? Is there too much hardware in there to stay cool? And why is a big brand like UGREEN turning to crowdfunding? Let’s discuss the DXP480T and whether it deserves your money and your data.

Note – The YouTube Review of the DXP480T NAS is Available HERE

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review – Quick Conclusion

There is ALOT of like her in the UGREEN DXP480T Flash NAS! Right now there is little to no alternative to this product in the market. Flash/SSD NAS has been around for a long time and even M.2 NVMe NAS systems have been cropping up in one form or another for 2+ years. But desktop and home-accessible M.2 NVMe Flash NAS solutions? Barely any. Notable alternatives such as the storage-rich Asustor Flashstor 6 / 12 Pro or the performance-rich QNAP TBS-464 or TBS-h574TX have been launched in the last 12 months, but the DXP480T is more powerful than the former and less expensive than the latter. However UGREEN and it’s DXP/NASync series are still very, VERY new in the market (green?) and alongside their NAS software being still a good distance away from fully stable, the choice to launch this new series of devices on crowdfunding is still a little puzzling for 12-14 year established brand in the tech sector. The system is fantastically compact, powerful for the scale, very rich in hardware features and all of this rollout out on a price tag at both early backer Kickstarter and eventual retail RRP that is highly challenging to beat!

But this is still a product that is not finished yet and therefore we need to keep that in mind! If this NAS an unfinished game, it is not ‘Cyberpunk’ or No Man Sky’ levels of incomplete – but it is still a good 20-30% unfinished in terms of features and optimization. I will be certainly keeping an eye on UGREEN as they progress, and hopefully they will challenge the status quo of Synology and QNAP right now, but we will have to wait and see. Bottom line, the DXP480T is 100% the BEST M.2 NVMe NAS system for it’s scale in terms of hardware, it’s just the rest of the software development going through the usual beta testing that is holding it back from greatness. Recent softening by UGREEN with regard to users installing 3rd party operating systems (TrueNAS, UnRAID, Open Media Vault, Proxmox hypervisor, etc) with regard to hardware warranty has definitely resolved/calmed the apprehension by many users though, so the beta software hurdle might not even be an issue for you. The crowdfunding still at has 30 days left (at the time of writing) and 9,800 backers pledging over $4,00,000 of funding seems to indicate this! But as always, this is crowdfunding and not traditional retail, so use caution! The DXP480T is a solid and unique system and I hope to talk even more about this and UGREEN spin-offs in future!

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 10/10
PERFORMANCE - 7/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 9/10


8.6
PROS
👍🏻xceptional Hardware for the Price4 x M.2 NVMe Flash system at this scale+price is fantastic!
👍🏻Great CPU Power vs Efficiency in the i5-1235u
👍🏻10GbE as standard is excellentWiFi 6E adds an extra and variable access method10/10 Build Quality
👍🏻Great Scalability
👍🏻Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
👍🏻Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
👍🏻Established Brand entering the NAS Market
👍🏻Low Noise
👍🏻Very Appealing retail package+accessoriesThunderbolt 4 connectivity ensures FAST local backups
👍🏻The Operating System SSD does not occupy a storage bay (extra 2242 m.2 SSD included)
CONS
👎🏻10GbE Performance was bit underwhelming
👎🏻Crowdfunding choice is confusing
👎🏻Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
👎🏻Only 1x Physical Network port means no wired failover
👎🏻Although 2 of the slots are 4x4 Speed, hardware lane limits mean 2 of the slots are 3x2

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review –  Retail Package

The retail kit for this system arrives impressively polished for a product still in its crowdfunding phase, featuring a well-decorated and well-presented retail package that efficiently packs a surprising amount of equipment into a modestly sized box.

Upon opening the stylish retail package, you’re welcomed by the system itself, encased in a protective matte plastic wrap. Remarkably compact for a four-bay (technically five) NAS system, it’s slightly larger than a mini PC, making it one of the smallest NAS systems reviewed on NAS compares.

The kit is comprehensive, excluding storage, including a gold-tipped Ethernet cable, thermal pads for M.2 NVMe SSD bays, extra screws, a setup manual, warranty information, and an external PSU.

Notably, the system comes with an official UGreen 140W PSU, reflecting the brand’s reputation for quality power supplies. The inclusion of first-party designed and branded components emphasizes the product’s proprietary nature, distinguishing it from rebranded hardware.

The entire retail kit’s presentation is thoroughly executed, showcasing a thoughtful design even in details like the instruction booklet—a feature many brands have phased out.

 

Every component’s quality is top-notch, setting the stage for a discussion on the DXP480T NAS’s design.

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review – Design

At a casual glance, you might easily assume that the DXP480T is a mini PC masquerading as a NAS. Given the influx of SOC-powered mini PCs from Eastern brands at low prices, this assumption wouldn’t be far-fetched. However, the DXP480T’s design is meticulously tailored to NAS functionality, with internal components arranged to optimize heat dissipation across its M.2 NVMe slots. This compact unit measures just 17.9cm x 14.2cm x 5.2cm, yet manages to house four M.2 2280 slots and an additional internal 2242 M.2 slot for the UGreen OS, making it one of the smallest NAS systems reviewed here on NAScompares and around half a kilo in weight!

Despite its compact size, the DXP480T does not support hot swapping due to its closed physical enclosure and the nature of M.2 drives, though E1.S drives are starting to challenge this norm. The chassis design is a balanced act of 50% active airflow and 50% heat dissipation, featuring plastic outer edges and a top composed of multiple heat dissipation panels connected to the internal hardware, alongside a large heatsink base with two built-in laptop-scale fans. This design emphasizes cleanliness and efficiency, given its storage capacity.

UGreen’s branding is prominent throughout, establishing a distinctive ‘house style’ for the NASync/DXP series right out of the gate. The system’s dimensions (18cm wide, 14cm deep, and 5.5cm tall, including rubber feet) enhance its appeal, offering a streamlined aesthetic without sacrificing functionality.

The fan-assisted panel, secured by two screws, hinges off to reveal the NVMe storage and the intricately designed heat dissipation panel surrounding it. Despite the limited physical space, UGreen has ingeniously incorporated ventilation from nearly every angle, maximizing passive airflow through mesh-covered vents on four of the system’s six sides.

This setup exposes four M.2 SSD slots, distinguished by build quality and clarity in design. However, the use of external face panels for active cooling restricts the use of SSDs with their own heatsinks. UGreen includes high-quality heat pads that align perfectly with SSD chips, compensating for this limitation.

Internally, the slots are divided into two speeds, likely due to the processor’s PCI lane availability, offering Gen 4 x 4 for the first two slots and PCIe Gen 3 x 2 for the remaining two. This strategic decision, driven by necessity, positions the DXP480T favorably against competitors, even if it means accepting some compromises in SSD speeds.

The minimalistic design extends to the system’s front, featuring only a single LED for power, omitting front-mounted USB ports for local backups. This choice, likely a trade-off for internal design efficiency, may disappoint some users looking for more convenient connectivity options.

In summary, the DXP480T’s design impresses with its compact form factor, efficient heat management, and thoughtful branding. While not without its limitations, particularly in external connectivity, UGreen’s meticulous attention to detail positions this NAS as a compelling option for users prioritizing sleek design and effective thermal management.

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review – Ports and Connections

As previously mentioned, the DXP480T’s ports and connectivity are located at the system’s rear, which results in a somewhat crowded arrangement and necessitates a few compromises.

One significant compromise concerning the device’s ports is its network connectivity. The system features a default 10GbE over a copper RJ45 connection, offering potential bandwidth of up to 1000 megabytes per second. This feature stands out, especially when considering the device’s competitive pricing compared to other NAS devices released in the last two years. However, the downside is that this is the sole physical network port, limiting options for failover or assigning service priorities to different IPs and devices.

The system compensates for this single network port to some extent with wireless connectivity.

An internal M.2 Wi-Fi card connector houses a Wi-Fi 6E network adapter and two antennas, supporting both host and client interfaces.

However, the current beta version of UGreen’s UGOS NAS software does not stably support this feature, and full development completion is still pending.

Additionally, the DXP480T offers Thunderbolt 4 connectivity via two USB-C connections. While Thunderbolt-enabled NAS devices are becoming popular in post-production environments, the DXP480T’s Thunderbolt ports are limited to host use, not supporting direct connections to Mac or Windows devices as clients. UGreen is exploring options to enable two-way communication for these ports. The device also includes USB 3 and USB 2 connections for storage and peripherals, and while direct host-client interfacing over USB is not supported, these connections add to the system’s versatility. However, the lack of a front-mounted USB port for easy local backups is a notable omission.

There is also an HDMI output, however at this time it can only be used for multimedia via the UGOS and is actioned via the mobile application (with doubles as a remote control). Unfortunately, this is not possible via the desktop/browser GUI and also HDMI access as a parallel GUI (either via an app in the docker/container app, a 3rd party media app like Plex/Emby/Jellyfin or an official HDMI GUI Portal that is comparable to HD Station from QNAP or Asustor Portal)

Despite these limitations, the inclusion of 10 GBE and basic Thunderbolt connectivity in such a compact NAS device, at a competitive price point, is commendable. However, the potential long-term system temperature remains a concern.

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review – Internal Hardware

When it comes to any kind of NAS system that focuses on SSD media, the internal hardware and layout of the system are paramount. SSD media, when overheated, will inevitably throttle, affecting both its performance and that of the surrounding system. Essentially, heat is the Achilles’ heel of flash SSD systems, and given the DXP480T’s compact size, significant effort will need to be made to manage this.

Equipped with a 10-core i5 processor, 8GB of DDR5 memory, ample storage bays, a dedicated OS SSD, a Wi-Fi card, and a 10G controller, it’s a challenge to fit all this into such a small enclosure. Initially, removing two screws around the storage media bays reveals a plastic layer.

Within, we find each of the individual 2280 M.2 NVMe slots. We also discover the SODIMM DDR5 memory slots, one of which is populated by a Samsung DDR5 memory module. Although the system doesn’t support ECC memory, it benefits from the native DDR5 support for on-die error correction. Nonetheless, many storage enthusiasts will likely be disappointed by the lack of ECC support in a flash server system.

As previously mentioned, the system includes a Wi-Fi 6 Intel wireless adapter connected to two internal antennas that encircle the system. It’s a tidy setup, and barring an upgrade to Wi-Fi 7 in the future, there’s little need for changes. It’s debatable how many users will utilize the 1.2Gbps connectivity offered by Wi-Fi 6E; though technically faster than traditional gigabit LAN, effective use requires close proximity. Despite this, it offers a form of failover for this system with a single physical ethernet connection.

The system also arrives with the UGreen NAS software pre-installed on a 2242 Phison E13 controller SSD, set in a Gen 3 x4 slot. Choosing to install the OS on a dedicated SSD, rather than through an eMMC or USB drive, will please some and annoy others. Typically, NAS brands use a bootloader on a small internal drive to install the OS on the main storage array, affecting the system’s performance based on the internal storage media used. Opting to install the OS directly onto an SSD ensures that system services and software run independently, not impacting the performance of the storage media, allowing for operation with new disks if necessary. However, this also means the OS drive lacks backup or redundancy, rendering the system inoperable should the drive fail, potentially damaging the storage media during intense operations. There are pros and cons, but overall, it seems preferable for the system software and services to reside on their dedicated SSD or partition.

Removing additional screws unveils the system’s core. It’s astonishing how much is packed into such a compact enclosure! The heart of the DXP480T features a custom micro-ITX board, housing an Intel i5 10-core processor (2p + 8e), integrated graphics, 20 PCIe lanes, and a maximum 55W TDP. Despite its compact SOC form, this 12th generation Intel i5 processor offers substantial power, benchmarking well against the N100 and Pentium 8505 models in other UGreen NAS models.

Testing this processor, especially in this early crowdfunding prototype, presents challenges. The DXP480T, like the rest of the UGreen NAS line-up, doesn’t officially support third-party OS installation without voiding the warranty. Consequently, we’re limited in our ability to benchmark using third-party OSs or reference previous benchmarks for similar architectures. The UGreen NAS’s operating system, still in beta, requires further optimization to fully showcase what the hardware can achieve.

This processor is well-equipped with sufficient PCIe lanes to manage the four M.2 NVMe SSDs, offering respectable speeds through SSH. The main concern with this processor selection is the lack of ECC memory support, crucial for high-speed flash systems to minimize bit errors during intensive operations.

Although SOC processors that support ECC are rare, especially from Intel, using one for this system and potentially for the DXP8800 Pro could significantly impact the price and development timeline. Nevertheless, this CPU is arguably the best choice for such a compact system in 2024, balancing power efficiency, heat management, and performance capabilities.

UGREEN DXP480T NASync NAS Tests

The Noise level of the system when in operation is very low and is genuinely only noticeable during busy periods when the twin base mini laptop style fans kick in. Here are the dB levels of the system when in idle/standby:

UGREEN DXP480T IDLE/STANDBY NOISE:

And here is the noise level of the system when the fans are in full active/use:

UGREEN DXP480T ACTIVE USE / FULL FAN NOISE:

The construction of the DXP480T flash NAS deserves high praise. Rather than modifying a mini PC case, UGreen designed a compact flash system from scratch, demonstrating considerable care and attention to component placement. The hardware is undoubtedly attractive, further emphasized by our deep dive into this and the DXP4800 Plus models. Yet, the performance and capabilities of the software remain to be seen.

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review – Performance & Software

The performance of the UGREEN DXP480T is something of a mixed bag. Clearly, compromises have needed to balance between the hardware resources on offer here and to keep the system’s smaller scale. For example, the 2x Gen 4×4 slots are only possible thanks to the scaling back of the 2x Gen 3×2 slots. They COULD have scaled all the slots (with a decent enough PCIe switch/controller) to all be 3×2 via bifurcation, but I think I prefer the 2 higher-performing slots at least giving me the chance to hit 5-7GB/s. I do wonder what they mean for those who plan on spreading a RAID 5 on the 4 M.2 NVMes – as this effectively means you have 2 drives with more bandwidth and irregular write across the 4 disks potentially (though realistically, it will just end up capping at the speed of drives 3 and 4). The performance of the DXP480T Flash system can be broken down into 2 main areas. Internal Performance and External Performance.

The Storage manager of UGOS features it’s on benchmarking tools that can be used per drive. The initial performance when I was using an early version of the software was severely unoptimized, but regular updates for the UGOS beta has rolled out almost weekly and with each, there has definitely been improvements in the system responsiveness and the performance of the drives. At the most recent test of the software, the Gen 4×4 slots of the system (populated with Phison E18 4×4 M.2 NVMes from Seagate Firecude 530 and Addlink A95) were hitting 5,100-5,500MB/s (5.5GB/s) performance. This is still around 1000MB/s less than what these drives are capable of (factoring in the mobile SoC processor and 8GB RAM), but as the software and services are still in beta, this performance might continue to improve throughout development. Then I ran the same test on the PCIe Gen 3×2 slots on the DXP480T. These ports were populated by Teamgroup T-Force Gen 3×4 SSDs, which have a reported 3,100MB/s performance when used in a x4 slot. However, as slot 3 and 4 of the DXP480T are Gen 3×2, I wondered how this would shake out. I was pleased to see a speed of 1.5-1.8GB/S – exactly what I wanted to see!

Then I accessed the system via SSH and used putty to directly benchmark the SSDs over cl. There was definitely some internal caching taking place in the early tests, however, the performance was still averaging around 5.5-6GB/s, which was very pleasing.

However, in order to ascertain if the SSDs in slots 1 and 2 were sharing any controller/switch (maybe even a larger lane being separated into the other 2 slots) I actioned data transfer between SSD 1 and SSD 2. The speed unsurprisingly halved, but was still much, much between the 1-1.5GB/s I encountered when performing this test 2 weeks and 2 firmware updates ago! Now I was hitting 2.5-3GB/s. For internal bandwidth saturation internally on this scale, that is still pretty good.

Then I performed numerous Windows 10GbE transfer tests. The Windows transfer of 20GB of data hit a clean 1,000MB/s saturation when I was using synthetic testing, but traditional transfers on Read activity (to my Windows 10, Gen 4×4 SSD OS Client) peaked at 550MB/s, but the Write was a little under 500MB/s. This decreased fairly rapidly over sustained performance as very clear oversaturation took hold. Upon raising this with the brand in advance of this review for comment, UGREEN told me that SMB performance and transfers are still undergoing optimization. I hope this is the case!

This continued to be the performance mark when I ran an AJA benchmark.

Crystal disk was run twice (using 2 different file size scales, 64MB and 1GB) and once again Read largely saturated the connection, whilst Write was still only 50-65% saturating the available 10GbE bandwidth.

Then I ended on an ATTO Diskbenchmark test that was..frankly.. wild! It was a fairly consistent 700-800MB/s on average, but the perpetual and sustained performance of ATTO benchmarks to the system definitely revealed some of the areas where optimization is still needed and the system was quickly oversaturated (fans ramping up quickly, the memory use very high for the comparatively simple task).

There is definitely some good performance potential here in the DXP480T – as long as UGREEN continue to improve and optimize. This is a prototype review unit (i.e a review unit provided prior to crowdfunding) and certainly feels that way – but numerous software patches that arrived BEFORE the crowdfunding arrived that improved things granularly and I have no reason to  believe that this will not continue from now till when/if the system begins fulfilment at crowdfunding and eventual full retail. Watch the video below to see the tests in full (it skips ahead directly to the testing):

Click Below to SKIP AHEAD to the Performance Testing of the DXP480T NAS

At the time of writing, the UGREEN NAS software is still in beta, with the mobile application is live now. Reviewing the software included with the DXP480T —as a final product— feels somewhat premature. The NASsync software beta reveals many baseline functions and long-term plans, which you can watch in the video version of the UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review in the video below:

You can read the MASSIVE Software review (covering the Desktop and Mobile experience) HERE on the NASCompares Review Article.

Regarding Power Consumption Tests of the UGREEN DXP480T NAS

NOTE – Power consumption tests were performed on the DXP480T during an earlier software beta revision. However, 3 further software and system service updates have been issued since these power consumption tests were performed 3 weeks ago and UGREEN (and a fellow YouTube Reviewer) have stated that this has improved the power efficiency of the system. Therefore in the interests of fairness (as the performance testing was performed on this later software revision (v1.0.0.0334), I have withdrawn my power test result and will be retesting soon and presenting it here + in a later video, as time allows.

The TL;DR on the UGREEN NAS software

The software is on track to become a smooth and user-friendly experience, comparable to giants like Synology and QNAP, especially in terms of the web browser experience. Unlike opting for the complexity of TrueNAS or the streamlined, container-focused UI of UnRAID, the UGREEN NAS software is more akin to Synology DSM. The foundation is clearly laid out for expansion in terms of features and tools for the user’s disposal. However, there are notable absences of baseline applications such as container or virtual machine support, and a multi-tiered backup solution within the web GUI (though the UGREEN NAS mobile and desktop clients are in development, expected to preview in March). Basic services for file management, shares, user account control, and an app center—soon to be linked to a repository—are all user-friendly but present some inconsistencies, likely due to its beta status and ongoing development. The physical product may be closer to final development, but the software needs more time for optimization. SMB services were less consistent than desired, and settings changes sometimes didn’t save or recall correctly. This is common for beta software finding its footing, yet it’s important to note that the hardware feels more refined than the software at this stage, months before user delivery. In brief:

What I liked:

  • Intuitive UI with services located logically and responsive controls.
  • The mobile application for iOS and Android is one of the best I have ever used in NAS!
  • Baseline services such as network interface management, user account control, firewall handling, and SSH interface control are all present.
  • A clearly defined app center awaiting connection to an online repository.
  • Helpful tips and guidance are available on most pages, aiding new users.
  • Support for modern services like SMB3 multi-channel and domain services in the beta.
  • Clear account and resource management accessible from the desktop, likely appealing to most users.
  • The inclusion of a remote access relay service and UGREEN account creation from day one, simplifying remote access for new users with built-in firewall and domain tools.
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – The HDMI output is now full controllable via the mobile application and is intuitive
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – A Docker application has now been added with access to numerous repository options!
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – SSH is now disabled by default

What I disliked:

  • Absence of two-factor authentication in the software.
  • Lack of virtualization applications at this stage.
  • Sporadic SMB performance.
  • The Security Advisor tool is only suitable for Antivirus and Anti-Maleware protection, not to scan the system for security weaknesses and advisory actions
  • The HDMI output cannot be used by the desktop/browser user to the same extent as the mobile application + cannot be used by container tools (Plex, Home Automation, etc)
  • In-progress language integration, leading to occasional default displays in Chinese or error messages in Chinese despite English settings.

Improvements needed:

  • Expansion of app integration and desktop client tools for easier system-client bridging.
  • Introduction of a default application for device discovery on the local network, a basic service offered by many NAS brands.
  • More information on UGREEN account and remote access security.

Acknowledging this is a beta, it’s fair to reserve full judgment until the software fully rolls out. As it stands, this beta is promising yet lacks some established NAS software fundamentals. Hopefully, we’ll see significant advancements as the release approaches.

Ugreen DXP480T NAS Review – Verdict and Conclusion

There is ALOT of like her in the UGREEN DXP480T Flash NAS! Right now there is little to no alternative to this product in the market. Flash/SSD NAS has been around for a long time and even M.2 NVMe NAS systems have been cropping up in one form or another for 2+ years. But desktop and home-accessible M.2 NVMe Flash NAS solutions? Barely any. Notable alternatives such as the storage-rich Asustor Flashstor 6 / 12 Pro or the performance-rich QNAP TBS-464 or TBS-h574TX have been launched in the last 12 months, but the DXP480T is more powerful than the former and less expensive than the latter. However UGREEN and it’s DXP/NASync series are still very, VERY new in the market (green?) and alongside their NAS software being still a good distance away from fully stable, the choice to launch this new series of devices on crowdfunding is still a little puzzling for 12-14 year established brand in the tech sector. The system is fantastically compact, powerful for the scale, very rich in hardware features and all of this rollout out on a price tag at both early backer Kickstarter and eventual retail RRP that is highly challenging to beat! But this is still a product that is not finished yet and therefore we need to keep that in mind! If this NAS was an unfinished game, it is not ‘Cyberpunk’ or No Man Sky’ levels of incomplete – but it is still a good 20-30% unfinished in terms of features and optimization. I will be certainly keeping an eye on UGREEN as they progress, and hopefully they will challenge the status quo of Synology and QNAP right now, but we will have to wait and see. Bottom line, the DXP480T is 100% the BEST M.2 NVMe NAS system for it’s scale in terms of hardware, it’s just the rest of the software development going through the usual beta testing that is holding it back from greatness. Recent softening by UGREEN with regard to users installing 3rd party operating systems (TrueNAS, UnRAID, Open Media Vault, Proxmox hypervisor, etc) with regard to hardware warranty has definitely resolved/calmed the apprehension by many users though, so the beta software hurdle might not even be an issue for you. The crowdfunding still at has 30 days left (at the time of writing) and 9,800 backers pledging over $4,00,000 of funding seems to indicate this! But as always, this is crowdfunding and not traditional retail, so use caution! The DXP480T is a solid and unique system and I hope to talk even more about this and UGREEN spin-offs in future!

PROS of the UGREEN DXP480T NAS CONS of the UGREEN DXP480T NAS
  • Exceptional Hardware for the Price4 x M.2 NVMe Flash system at this scale+price is fantastic!
  • Great CPU Power vs Efficiency in the i5-1235u
  • 10GbE as standard is excellentWiFi 6E adds an extra and variable access method10/10 Build Quality
  • Great Scalability
  • Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
  • Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
  • Established Brand entering the NAS Market
  • Low Noise
  • Very Appealing retail package+accessoriesThunderbolt 4 connectivity ensures FAST local backups
  • The Operating System SSD does not occupy a storage bay (extra 2242 m.2 SSD included)
  • 10GbE Performance was bit underwhelming
  • Crowdfunding choice is confusing
  • Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
  • Only 1x Physical Network port means no wired failover
  • Although 2 of the slots are 4×4 Speed, hardware lane limits mean 2 of the slots are 3×2

Click the Link Below to find out more about the UGREEN NASync NAS Series on the brand’s official Site:

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

UGREEN NAS Software – The UGOS Beta Review

Par : Rob Andrews
3 avril 2024 à 18:00

UGREEN NASync NAS Storage Software Early Beta Review

Many of you might have already heard about the NAS solution (the NASync DXP series) coming from UGREEN soon. Arriving initially on Kickstarter on the 26th March, this product will hopefully be rolling out to backers in mid-summer 2024, with it no doubt arriving at traditional retail after then. As good as the hardware all sounds on the DXP2800, DXP4800, DXP6800, DXP8800 and DXP480T), what about the software? UGREEN NAS devices arrive with the UGOS software (alongside some client toosl for PC, Mac, Android and iOS) and many users want to know if it is any good, what state the current beta is in, and ultimately how good is this inclusive software. So, today I am going through the UGREEN UGOS NAS software (at the time of writing, version 1.0.0.0483), discussing what I like, what I don’t and indications of where UGREEN seems to be headed with this Debian-based platform

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software (Beta) Review – The TL:DR

In a rush? let’s get to the point! Here is what I think of the UGREEN NAS software for desktop and NAS:

What I liked About the UGREEN UGOS Software Beta What I did not like about the UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta
  • The Mobile Application is exceptionally good, for an ‘in development’ system
  • The building blocks for future apps and services are there
  • All the RAID, Caching, Maintenance and Sharing protocols are in place (BTRFS too)
  • Storage Manager is intuitive and clear
  • Very good help/assistance services
  • Search functionality and File Management tools are smooth, responsive and user-friendly
  • AI services in photo tools are good and diverse
  • Quick Repair for on RAID drive blocks is nice extra
  • The Manual Deduplication tool is also a nice extra touch
  • System power, controls, schedules and operation management is all very user-friendly
  • All the system options, UX and placement are exactly where they should be
  • File Service controls, Firewall Controls and Network management controls are clear and fully featured (for the most part, MTU was fixed)
  • Lack of 2FA/OTP Authentication
  • Inconsistencies in fonts and design at points
  • Lack of WORM and Encryption at key points vs others in the market
  • A rigid/fixed Photo Album is inflexible
  • Multimedia applications are few and far between currently
  • Currently no VM/Container tool
  • 3rd Party OS support invalidates hardware warranty
  • Further drive performance optimization is needed (getting better with each update, but still not ‘there’ yet)
  • File transfer notifications not prominent enough
  • Security Manager priorities are poor and do not factor in system insecurities (i.e anti-ransomware protocols) and instead prioritize virus’ and malware
  • Backup and Sync Tools are still very early days and do not support Cloud services
  • Desktop Client tool feels unfinished ATM

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Mobile Application

Although I will get onto the PC/Mac desktop user experience in a while, I wanted to start this software review with the mobile application as 1) It will likely be the most frequently used means for new/novice users to interact with the UGREEN NAS, and 2) because it is arguably further along in terms of development and polish than the browser GUI. The mobile application is available for iOS and Android and is genuinely exceptionally well presented. The main application dashboard allows you to manage multiple UGREEN NAS devices on the LAN/Network, or remotely via the UGREEN account relay services. Upon logging in, you are presented with a single mobile dashboard to manage..well… everything. In my testing and evaluation, I only found 2-3 things that are not possible in the mobile app that were possible via the desktop. The UX is smooth, clear and was responsive the entire time. ALL of the testing )(and screenshots below) were conducted with the app connecting with the NAS remotely over 5G/4G SIM (cellular) mobile services and not network/WiFi.

Rather than providing multiple tailored apps for photos, videos, system management, etc, UGREEN have instead opted for a Swiss army knife ‘1 app’ approach. All applications running on the NASync system are accessible and usable via the app (with the exception of the management of the Sync and Backup target tools – more on that later). In most cases the apps run in a tailored GUI (eg the photo apps is more thumbnail-focused with native tools to hand via overlay buttons, whereas config controls are more ‘textual’ and rigid). This also extends to the ‘Control Panel’ of the system, which has practically all system controls to hand and is usable to the same degree at the desktop via a browser. Really impressed with the work that has gone into the design and UX here.

Pretty much all the system information is accessible (supporting copy/paste click tools too) and further live hardware information is readily available (something often undercut or inaccessible in many NAS mobile apps, in efforts to ‘keep it simple’).

Interestingly, the hardware power controls via the mobile app are also pretty extensive. I expected ‘Power On and Off’ and maybe a Wake On LAN option sure, but I was not expecting fan controls, LED controls, scheduled power scheduling customization, drive hibernation controls and system file service actions. These are rarely all available in NAS mobile apps (for fear of overcomplicating mobile tools). It’s ALOT to take in, but overall I think it’s a good thing. Novice users might disagree.

File management services (ie a File/Folder’ explorer) is also built into the app that gives FULL access and control of the files on the NAS. There the basic ‘copy, paste, cut’ options and ‘upload from phone’ options, but it also then expands towards uploading specific file types (unusual), shared folder creation on the fly, changing access rights and permission to existing shared storage areas – it’s a lot of control to include in the swiss army knife single app, when they could have likely got away with a basic file manage option included with the system manager tool. Colour me impressed.

This level of control and management also extends to the main storage manager (i.e Pools, Volumes, etc). You can action complete Storage Pool creation (i.e RAID building), Volume creation, SSD cache options, manage permissions and even action RAID rebuilding when needed. Really impressed with the presentation and depth of control in this mobile tool.

The task manager tool in the mobile GUI is handled like any other application, with its own design and layout, but (much like the desktop experience i will discuss later) lacks historical analytics on the system hardware – something I hope UGREEN resolve later. Media Server services can be managed via the app, as well as accessing and pushing of links/3D barcodes and files to the download manager for HTTP/BT downloads.

The Photos tool is quick slick and responsive but is perhaps still in needs of a little more optimization, as although the thumbnail generation was quick snappy, the layout always felt quite ‘squished’. That said, all the photography options and control of the AI categorization services were present here. The Map view (using scraped metadata from mobile photos) worked great and all facial recognition tags that were actioned on the NAS Desktop GUI were carried over smoothly. As were sharing links that were created, that could be managed and customized with ease too.

Mobile synchronization was 50% good news and 50% bad news. The good news was that photo backups from your phone are smooth and can be tailored quite well to your network/storage needs (even including some useful destination sorting options). However there was NOT an option to arrange scheduled or automatic backups of the REST of my phone storage – just the photos. That is a shame, as I cannot be the only user who would quite like to automatically backup my WHOLE phone storage periodically on a schedule (maybe 1AM whilst I sleep?). Unfortunately, you are currently forced to manually upload files and folders to the File manager application. Hopefully UGREEN will roll out a ‘whole phone storage’ backup option down the line in future updates.

On the whole, I am really impressed with the mobile application for managing your UGREEN NAS and it feels like this has been a priority for the brand in the software development for this soon-to-land-on-kickstarter NAS. Let’s move over to the desktop and go through the system management of your UGREEN NAS on your web browser.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Browser GUI Presentation

The UGREEN NAS OS is accessible via the web browser, either over the local area network or remotely via the use of UGREEN’s online services with the use of a free account. This is pretty much the same as other turnkey NAS brands, but we have yet to see how well it will handle multiple users using this service on mass. Neverthless, if you only plan on local network access, this will work fine. The web based GUI (at least, in version 1.0.0.0483 that I used) was very responsive and did not require any internet access.

As you might expect, the user account that you create during initialization can be customized once you login (the super user admin account is disabled by default). The range of customization to the account is a little limited in the beta. You can change your user avatar, change your password, view your activity, check your storage quota and connect it with a UGREEN account. There is a lack of 2-step authentication in the beta (2FA/OTP etc) which I was a little disappointed by, but aside from that, this is all what I would have expected.

Changing the browser GUI is fairly normal and the range of changes (wallpaper, languages, time etc) are present, but that’s about it. Again, all standard stuff that is good to see, but not going to blow you away.

clicking the grid of menu dots at the top right shows you the app control deck that shows the tools and services you have installed. These can also be dragged onto the actual GUI desktop much like you would find on your local OS desktop from Windows, Mac or Chrome. I will add thought that the font of the text does seem quite dated.

Ther is a support option on the desktop and App list that opens up into a dedicated support portal. I tested this with the internet services disconnected and can confirm that all of the ‘App Guide’ options are locally accessible (i.e offline accessible), whereas the Information center requires internet access to open up and get further support.

The search functionality of the App Guide also works fast and it has pretty much everything you would need to get the basics/fundamental assistance you might need on the first phase of owning the device.

Eg, the network settings option below gave a decent amount of advice and information for IPV4/IPV6 gateways. There was certainly something of a conflict in the fonts and presentation again, but this is a beta.

The ‘Contact us’ tab of the support section provided numerous tools for getting in touch with UGREEN. There was the usual contact number, online messaging/IM platform and support portals, but what really stood out was the online remote access support option that could allow UGREEN to access your system for maintenance or support. This is not unusual (lots of NAS brands do it), but I am glad to see it present here and controllable from the user end. When my system was updated between versions, I encounter an issue (related to my system not being on a whitelist of approved beta OS devices) and I used this system to allow UGREEN in. I was able to monitor the access comfortably. I would nevertheless feel better if I knew I could lock this behind a unique 1 use key everytime though.

The main GUI also has a search functionality built into the top bar that was responsive and allowed me to quick search for filesacross the system, as well as utilize the ‘Universal Search’ function to search deeper and use tailored filters.

The Universal search function broke down searches quite well and even provided further image and file information as I searched – something generally not included in search tools at the surface level on a NAS, due to the indexing of the metadata being something of a pain at this level (though widely accessible in a file manager). Overall, I was happy with the zippy responsiveness of the search functionality. It will be interesting to see how much offline AI search functionality could be added here down the line.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Storage Manager

The storage manager is very well presented and showed me all the information that I wanted/expected. A graphical display of the populated bays, drive temp, suggestions of further actions I could/should perform and the additional context options were intuitively on the left-hand side.

A nice extra touch that I liked was the fact you can add storage widgets to the primary storage manager page. This means you can add specific monitoring for your needs.

For the more analytically minded, there is a much more text-rich breakdown of the storage in the control panel:

You can break down the storage manager view to the individual disks (which will depend on the UGREEN system being used) and from here you can view drive health (SMART), run performance tests individually, run scheduled checksum, check temps and more.

In a previous version of the UGOS UGREEN NAS software, when I ran the performance test on the Gen 4×4 slots of the DXP4800 Plus, I got quite poor speeds (around 1.5GB/s, instead of the expected 5-6GB/s at the very least). So, I was looking forward to retesting.

I am pleased to confirm that in this newer OS version, the 4×4 slot for this Gen4 NVMe was able to hit a comfortable 5.1GB/s Read or 5.5GB/s Write. Still not the 6GB+ I would have liked to have seen, but I appreciate that they are still optimizing this. Also, I would like to see further clarification on the actual test (block/file size for the test, something a little more analytical). Additionally, despite me running 3-4 different SSD performance tests, the layout of the GUI only allows me to see the first one (with no means to display the results of the later tests). Still, at least there is improvement here.

Alongside drive health and performance tests, there is also an option to directly wipe an HDD or SSD inside the UGREEN NAS. However, there was no clarification on the method/scale of this wipe (eg is this a secure wipe, writing out each block, or a casual format that just deleted the index). It would be nice to know more about the depth of this Data Wiping.

The Storage Management tab showed more information on the individual pools an volumes. I had a RAID 5 and BASIC pool in one UGREEN NAS system and RAID 0 and RAID 1 in another one.

You can choose to use EXT4 or BRTRFS as the file system of choice for the volumes, though there was no support of Write Once, Read Many (WORM) – which in 2024, is a bit of a pain!

There IS however, support of RAID resync priority options and even a Quick Repair option (whereby the system will prioritize only the areas of a disk during a RAID rebuild that would have data, then zero’s out the rest in order to vastly speed up the RAID rebuild of partially full Storage pools).

Creating Storage Pools and volumes feels easy and intuitive. They have kept it simply, which is going to be great for movies (but experts might find it limiting). There is support of the usual RAID configurations of RAID 0, 1, 5, 6 10, but no flexible RAID system (like Synology Hybrid RAID – SHR or TRAID).

You can apply schedule drive health tests (not uncommon on NAS devices).

Additionally, there are options present to control the USB drive via the storage manager to prohibit access generally or completely.

Overall, the storage management is a little sparse BUT it is definitely ease to use, intuitive and provides the majority of base-level functionality a new NAS user is going to need. I am disappointed at the lack of more prosumer options such as WORM (though I will forgive the lack of a flexible RAID system like SHR, as that is not exactly common in the world of NAS anyway). UGREEN are clearly focusing on the fundamentals here (perhaps looking at Synology and DSM for…inspiration?). I hope to see further optimization and explanation around the performance benchmarking tools, but apart from that I am happy. Let’s discuss the object file/folder access in the Web Browser GUI and the quality of the UGREEN File Browser.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – File Manager

Much like turnkey solutions currently in the market from Synology and QNAP (with DSM and QuTS respectively), the UGREEN NAS software includes a browser-based File Manager. This allows you to see and interact with data on your NAS in a much more native way, as well as take advantage of traditional copy, paste, archive, uncompress and deletion tools. The File Browser also integrates native ‘right click’ context options whilst in use in your web browser. Again, as mentioned earlier, non of this is ‘new’ to the industry, but it is still good that this new NAS software in the market is nailing the fundamentals.

Folders can be created in the file manager that can be standard breadcrumb, personal folders that are related to an individual user, or shared folders that can be used by network-connected client devices or applications. Control and access (i.e Read/Write Rules) can be set to individual users and groups. There was no option to apply any encryption or write once rules to these shared folders however.

The context menus of the file manager also allow users to share files/folders easily, with support of sharing with other UGREEN NAS users or via a unique link. Rules for it’s use (date of expiry, number of access sessions, password protection, etc) can be applied during their creation.

Additionally, files can be directly shared from the Universal Search tool (discussed earlier) with similar share rule controls in place.

The overall/global settings of the file manager are all fairly standard, but more interestingly there are also a few extra options in the management tab. These include controls for your user personal folder, a management portal for existing shared links, a private collection folder option (to add specific files as needed on the fly), recycle bin management (date of true deletion, where it is applicable etc) and more interestingly, a File deduplication option.

The File Deduplication option (unlike backend deduplication which works automatically and, in the case of ZFS, in line) allows you to manually select folder directories and action the system to scan for duplicate files (so, photos, music, docs, etc) and then it will allow you to action space-saving measures. This feature felt a little unfinished and poorly optimized, but does show promise and is definitely positive feature!

I can also confirm that playback of video files, via the File Manager was smooth. It definitely required compression/license support on your respective browser/os, but files played and there was options to downgrade video quality, minimize in the corner of the screen and navigate playback easily. I would still much, MUCH rather a native video playback application (as I assume 3rd party client devices such as Amazon Fire TV, Roku, PS5, etc are going to rely on 3rd party network players), but this is still a positive development. On the other side, no Plex Media Server application in this current version of the beta, and no container application to create a custom deployment. Hopefully, this will be resolved soon.

When it came to checking photo viewing i nthe file manager, I can confirm that it i s supported and a Picture Preview service is included. Later on we will discuss the standalone AI powered photo application.

Unfortunately, audio playback was not possible and any attempts to playback .MP3, .WMA or .WAV all resulted in just a download prompt and no playback i nthe browser. Not a big deal, but without an audio player tool in place, it does make checking/previewing audio data rather clunky.

Copy/Paste/Cut actions on files generate a File Copy task in the notifications panel at the top right of the screen. This is all good and was dynamic/animated, however there was no clear indication that this was taking place (eg the notification appearing upon actioning the copy/paste) and no indication in the file manager. Not a massive deal, but it left me wondering if the action was actually happening. I should not need to actively check the task center to know that my ‘write action’ is occuring.

The File Manager is a robust tool that, although not currently as feature-rich as the one found in QNAP QTS or Synology DSM, it gives you pretty much everything you are going to need for basic/day-to-day file management in the web browser. It definitely still needs tweaks and optimization, but it’s in a very good state currently and even has a few options like manual deduplication and ‘collection options that are being presented uniquely in their platform. Let’s discuss system management via the Control Panel.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Control Panel

The control panel is pretty much exactly as you might expect, pretty clear UI and although I would appreciate an ‘advanced’ tab (as compressing all the system controls into 12 icons seems quite strict), it is definitely not an intimidating presentation here. To go through ALL of the settings would effectively quadruple the length of this UGREEN UGOS Beta review, but I will cover elements that stood out for me (both good and bad).

I like that the system is arriving (even in this beta) with a completely customizable and user-friendly scheduled On/Off organizer. Those of you who want to ensure the system is only in operation during peak/necessary periods (for reasons of noise, power consumption or security) will appreciate how fleshed out this section is.

Likewise, the system software already has fan controls in place (I tested on both the DXP4800 PLUS and DXP480T, both responded immediately).

There was also an option to reset all your network connections to default (setting all static IPs, subnets, etc back to dynamic and default), as well as the option to factory reset the system. I think the wording of the later needs to be improved, as it is not hugely clear about the implications of this choice.

Finally, there was the support of LED controls. This is something I hoped for, as the LEDs of the 3.5″ SATA UGREEN models are exceptionally bright (white) and alongside the option to dim them, there was even a scheduled option that allows you to set a plan to lower them during specific periods of the hour (and day/weel). It’s a small option, but I do appreciate it!

Alongside the network management options (that we will cover more later on in the article) there is also established support for bonding/trunking of the ports. Again, not ‘new’, but a welcome addition to this launch beta software.

There are established management and controls for the remote access via the UGREENLink service (As well as creating a dynamic domain name for the system for remote access). I did not explore this during my time with the beta, as I want to hold off till closer to the established product for a more realistic expectations vs experience on this one!

When it comes to terminal/backend access, the option for Telnet was disabled, but the option for SSH was ‘enabled’. I have mixed feelings about this, as although I did use SSH and Putty to access the system to verify the PCI layout and some disk testing for the system reviews, I KNOW it would be much better to have this disabled by default. As this is a Beta software package, there is a good chance that this will be disabled in the full software release (only enabled here for troubleshooting, debugging and maintenance), but nonetheless, I would like to see this ‘off’ by default in the full release.

The system task manager was fairly standard, showing plenty of system service and process information. There was no option to ‘kill/Hibernate’ services (as you might find in your Windows Task Manager), but that is not unusual in NAS software, for fear of corrupting the system services.

The graphical system resource display of the task manager was very detailed, clear and intuitive. It covered pretty much EVERYTHING and was very responsive. My only real complaint here would be that there was no option to record the task manager analytical information. i.e going into it showed you the current system resource use from that moment, nothing from the past. Adding an option to allow the system to maintain a record (even as a check box option, as featured in Synology DSM) would allow much, MUCH better long-term analytical benefits for this 24×7 system.

Regarding software updates, the system has configurable options to allow the system OS updates to be actioned automatically or manually, with the system periodically pinging the UGREEN update server to check it’s status (which can be disabled). I will add that during my early time with the UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS and DXP480T, I had difficulty upgrading my software to the newer version for this beta review and it turned out to be related to my address/serial requiring adding to a white list. I am sure this is not going to be an issue when the software and hardware fully rolls out, but those reading this wondering why their beta software is not showing the same version as them might find this is the issue.

Also, the UGREEN NAS systems arrive with UPS support to allow automatic pinging in the event of a power cut/brown-out and the system safely power itself down safely straight away, or maintain operation for a given period. This is a small thing and relatively common in NAS circles, but nonetheless nice to see in their software out the gate!

As mentioned, I could probably go through everything in the control panel and make this article a few thousand words longer… but I won’t! There are user/group controls, time and language controls (the later of which seemed to still present Chinese text periodically, but this IS a beta) and lots of system information options. Overall, it’s a decent control panel and backend, but maybe adding a few tips/guidance in places and perhaps an Easy/Advanced tab in a ver.2 of the software down the line might be appealing. Let’s discuss system security maintenance.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Security

Now, let’s be a bit neutral here for a sec! We are talking about a BETA of the UGREEN NAS software, so I understand that this is an in development product and therefore the potential for vulnerabilities, fixed default credentials and loose ends are going to be high. However, I DO think we need to use this UGOS beta for a good indication of what UGREEN are layout the tracks down for (both good and bad!). The system arrives with a Security Manager tool that allows you to action ad-hoc/scheduled system scanning. This generates logs and also allows you to select actions for files deemed suspicious or compromised.

I will say though, that it wasn’t hugely clear on what exactly was being actioned in this tool. It might well be a question of an ‘in development’ GUI overlaying the tool, but I assumed that a security manager on the UGREEN NAS would work through a list of pre-defined security parameters (eg weak passwords, SSH left enabled, default ports, firewall usage, etc).

This Security Manager seemed to be prioritizing the search for Malware/Exploitative Files/Virus’ etc – which is actually comparatively rare as an attack vector in modern in NAS circles compared to RANSOMWARE attacks – which only require a path INTO the NAS to inject code and get the system to lock up the data, which is then used to blackmail users into exchanging bitcoin for the key. This security manager didn’t give me a vibe that it was addressing this. Still, it IS a beta and I will 100% welcome being corrected on this.

The majority of the File services (except SMB) were disabled by default (and SSH was enabled, but again this might be Beta related).

The system also arrives with Firewall management services (disabled by default, but easy to enable).

I would say though that these controls do need a little more explanation for beginners (I say this to most NAS brands really) as a lot of users will blanketly enable this service, or worse play with their port services, without understanding the significance of the action. This does need a little more tips/explanation I think (there is a single ‘?’ tip, and that’s it).

There is also a log center that keeps track of the activity on the system. It’s all clear, if a little basic and reports can be exported logs from this GUI.

Alternatively, there is a notification configuration in the Log center to ensure that events and alerts are delivered to important system users as needed. The configuration and filtering of this is a bit sparse, but the structure is there to work upwards from.

Network management is also present and alongside the usual traffic controls (i.e MB/s limits to specific physical connections and even user network quota in other sections) are present, there is also fairly standard network configuration options. These include the jumbo frames / MTU, adapting the IP to fixed/dynamic, bonding the connections (mentioned earlier) and prioritizing connections. There is no options for virtual networks and management here (understandably not a priority as the physical connections are only 2x tops and there is no container/VM manager to necessitate this kind of service), and although an earlier version of the beta provided spotty network and SMB services, this has now been resolved in this software version.

The system’s default ports (for both encrypted and non-encrypted non-certificate access) can be adjusted at anytime via the control panel, as well as the option to apply custom certificates when needed too. Standard stuff, but positive to see it here on the outset.

With regard to security, what we find here in the UGOS beta is a lot of the entry-level stuff and fundamental building blocks, but still not quite enough for me to think this beta software is as watertight as TrueNAS or Synology DSM (understandable, given the beta status and maturity). The structure is there, it just needed building on and hopefully, this is what we will see as the software develops towards delivery. The security Manager tool needs to be better displayed, a deeper focus on system integrity checks in these scans, integration of 2FA/OTP services, etc. Until I see these features getting added (alongside assurances that SSH will indeed be ‘off’ be default), I would not be too cosy making this beta software internet-connected. Let’s discuss the individual applications that are included with this Beta of UGREEN UGOS currently.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – App Center

At the time of writing and in the current beta version, the Application center has approx 15 applications (5-6 of which I would consider base-line / default). I fully expect more to appear when the software is more polished and closer to launch, as well as hopefully support of popular 3rd party applications to be adapted to the UGOS ANS system (Plex, Emby, TailScale, etc), but right now it is a little sparse (understandable for a beta – I KNOW I keep saying that!).

There is also the option to manually install applications, but these still need to be installed in the UGOS format.

Updates to the individual applications can be actioned manually, or set to automatically apply when the system is aware of a patch/update. These do NOT require the system to reboot, but will require the application or service to restart. All perfectly normal in a NAS.

Individual applications are displayed in a familiar format (name, version, description, images, etc) but also have the option to ‘stop’ when needed or restart. Again, all is fairly par of the course for NAS systems in 2024. Additionally, when installing applications to choose which storage volume you want to application to run from. This is less of a concern currently, but if the previously promised/discussed VM/Container tools arrive in time for full OS launch, these will certainly benefit from living on a faster media volume!

The Application center is all pretty much what you would expect. It’s nailed down all the framework and structure, it’s responsive (though you cannot install multiple apps at once, currently it is 1 at a time – optimization needed no doubt) and I cannot really fault the GUI of it. It’s just a little empty right now and until a better arrangement of tools and services are included, I will hold off any further judgement.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Multimedia

How the system handles your multimedia is going to be pretty important to a lot of users. In the beta version I was provided with, there was only a small handful of 1st party media applications to use, something that will no doubt change as time goes on (in particular, the support of 3rd party applications, thanks to the Debian base of the operating system). The main media apps that were included in my version of the OS was the Photos application and a DLNA Media Server app.

The Photos application boasts the support of AI recognition (something that is available from several of the established NAS brands and their OS right now), as well as easy file sharing, private/public photography areas, smart filters and metadata scraping for custom album creation. The thumbnail generation was very prompt and I was left impressed by it.

Additionally, you can switch between the full-screen display mode and the folder view at the touch of a button, which is nice. But that brings me to the whole ‘folder limit thing’…

One thing I was less impressed about however, was the fact the photo application requires a fixed directory for it’s media library. So, you currently cannot point the application at any custom folder to crawl for your media, but instead, it needs to be in a specific user folder. This is similar to what you find in the Synology Photos application, and many users (myself included ) weren’t huge fans of it then either!

Now, one of the reasons for this MIGHT be because the Photos application has an impressive range of AI core services available (scene/object recognition, faces, pets, offensive, duplicate and locational data scraping) that I imagine requires a lot of pre-set locations to run at their most efficient/effective.

The facial recognition is a little basic at the moment, but DOES work. It crawled the 5 sample albums that I uploaded quickly and it was roughly as successful as other NAS brand’s efforts in this area.

Merging user’s faces was quick and easy, though I did not find it especially good at searching for group users based on their names (eg text searching for photos with those 2 users tagged via facial recognition), but using the smart filters on the main page, right side, worked fine.

Likewise, the system did a good job of scraping the geolocational data from the photos, and then displaying them in a map format. It was a little temperamental (always starting in China), but you would be surprised how many NAS brands get this map view wrong, or not even provide it at all.

Additionally, the OCR/AI Text crawling that occurred during the indexing periods was very good and any photo that had text was immediately pre-crawled for words that would be displayed when clicking the relevant icon in the preview window.

Not to give the AI/Software too much credit, as a lot of the information is kept in the metadata of the images. Nevertheless, it was good that the system was able to take advantage of this so quickly and factor it into some intelligent searches and categorization. That said, the ‘object recognition was virtually zero and I assume this is something still WiP – annoying, but ok.

The duplication removal tool was also integrated here into the photo applications, as well as the management of the file sharing that you might be actioning. The blurred photo removal tool was a little hit and miss, but then again these 5 albums were already pre-curated and therefore there was;t much smudge/blur photography for it to get its feet into.

Image sharing provided pretty much all the configuration and security precautions we say previously (password, validity period, download #s, etc). There weren’t any restrictions for HTTPS, or encrypted transfers though. There was also an option to restrict to registered NAS system users only.

As mentioned, the only other media application that I was able to see in the beta software I used was the DLNA media server application.

This was super basic and only provided an on/off switch, then the option to choose which directories could be accessible for multimedia sharing on the local area network:

1st party multimedia playback support is probably one of the weakest areas of the UGREEN NAS UGOS software in this beta and I sincerely hope it gets addressed closer to launch. Additionally, the option to conveniently install 3rd party multimedia applications via a verified app center section that includes Plex, Jellyfin, Emby etc would make things significantly better!

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Backups and Synchronization

Much like the multimedia support of the UGREEN UGOS NAS services, the backup and synchronization tools afforded to the OS are still ‘in progress’ in this beta. There are a few services in place and clear indications of things to come, but its still not a complete backup package yet at this time of writing. The Sync and Backup tool allows backing up of data from 3rd party and UGREEN NAS servers to sync with your NAS over RSync.

This works in either direction of course, but the range of supported targets ends there. There isn’t currently a desktop client backup/sync tool in place (hopefully this is something that might well get integrated into the UGREEN PC Client in time) and supported Sync/Backup platforms still does not include cloud services (Google Drive, DropBox, etc).

There are a few ‘coming soon’ options greyed out and the option to manually select a connected USB drive via the ‘local folder’ option is available,

But it still feels like it needs more time in the oven. There general structure is in place, but the scope of what yo can do with it in the desktop browser GUI is still in its early beta stages clearly.

Backups and Sync jobs DO at least have versioning supported, which does mean that wether you are syncing a local folder or remote system, the roll back option is still available.

Indeed, the system configuration backup is also available, but only the system backend – not the whole system data as an image backup. This configuration backup can be sent to a local folder (inc connected USB) or to your UGREEN account.

 

The backup and synchronization tools definitely need more time in development and although I am really pleased to see them here, I do think they are a good way away from completion to a stable and satisfactory degree for your 3-2-1 backup routines right now.

UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review – Desktop Client Tool

At the time of writing this review, UGREEN rolled out a range of client tools for PC, Mac, iOS and Android. Although the Mobile application review and write up is still in progress (but TLDR, it is VERY polished in comparison to the desktop browser GUI), the desktop client tool was available and although it works, the scope of what you can do with it is a little limited. You can use it to scan your local area network for a UGREEN NAS, or enter remote UGREEN account login credentials and sign in.. and.. that’s about it!

The UGREEN NAS Desktop client then opens up a faux browser window (akin to a remote desktop) to view the GUI of the NAS. That is really it. It’s not much different from the browser and is not a big difference in resource consumption on your local system either. I was hoping to see ‘mapping network drive’ options, remote system setting configuration, local folder sync or even a terminal input. But no, just allowing a browserless access portal.

This written review of the UGREEN UGOS NAS software is still very much ‘in progress’ and I will be adding further details later on, as well as detailing the mobile application.

What I liked About the UGREEN UGOS Software Beta What I did not like about the UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta
  • The Mobile Application is exceptionally good, for an ‘in development’ system
  • The building blocks for future apps and services are there
  • All the RAID, Caching, Maintenance and Sharing protocols are in place (BTRFS too)
  • Storage Manager is intuitive and clear
  • Very good help/assistance services
  • Search functionality and File Management tools are smooth, responsive and user-friendly
  • AI services in photo tools are good and diverse
  • Quick Repair for on RAID drive blocks is nice extra
  • The Manual Deduplication tool is also a nice extra touch
  • System power, controls, schedules and operation management is all very user-friendly
  • All the system options, UX and placement are exactly where they should be
  • File Service controls, Firewall Controls and Network management controls are clear and fully featured (for the most part, MTU was fixed)
  • Lack of 2FA/OTP Authentication
  • Inconsistencies in fonts and design at points
  • Lack of WORM and Encryption at key points vs others in the market
  • A rigid/fixed Photo Album is inflexible
  • Multimedia applications are few and far between currently
  • Currently no VM/Container tool
  • 3rd Party OS support invalidates hardware warranty
  • Further drive performance optimization is needed (getting better with each update, but still not ‘there’ yet)
  • File transfer notifications not prominent enough
  • Security Manager priorities are poor and do not factor in system insecurities (i.e anti-ransomware protocols) and instead prioritize virus’ and malware
  • Backup and Sync Tools are still very early days and do not support Cloud services
  • Desktop Client tool feels unfinished ATM

Click the Link Below to find out more about the UGREEN NASync NAS Series on the brand’s official Site:

In the meantime, you can use the video below for the FULL software overview of the UGREEN NAS software:

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

The Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Review

Par : Rob Andrews
29 mars 2024 à 15:00

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Technically ‘Jonsbo N2 and a Half’?

I think it would be fair to say that in the world of DIY NAS building, few brands have achieved a similar level of notoriety and acclaim as Jonsbo. This Chinese brand, once non-descript and relatively unknown, promises efficient and cool server enclosures, eventually getting their products front and center in the most prestigious communities for those building their very own server from scratch. At the start of 2024, we saw the release of the Jonsbo N4, a new desktop NAS chassis that seemingly wants to coexist between the profiles of the rest of the devices in their portfolio. Arriving slightly less scalable than that of the N3, yet offering more physical space than that of the N2, the Jonsbo N4 is, however, the first NAS enclosure by the brand to support M-ATX motherboards—an exceptionally long-requested feature! So, is this new Jonsbo enclosure a better purchase for you and your aspiring DIY NAS build? Does it deserve your data?

Note – You can watch my review of the Jonsbo N4 NAS Case HERE on YouTube

UPDATE – The Jonsbo N4 NAS Case is Now Available to Buy on AliExpress HERE

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Quick Conclusion

I like the Jonsbo N4 NAS Case, but there is no denying that for so many reasons the N3 is a superior NAS enclosure. Earlier this year when the N4 was first announced, we made a comparison guide on the N2, N3 and N4 (HERE) and reached the conclusion that the N4 was arguably the most niche unit of the series so far, making us wonder if perhaps Jonsbo had got these numbers in the wrong order! Fast forward to now and when we have spent some time with the N4 case and that opinion has not changed at all! The N4 IS a good NAS case, but in efforts to support MATX motherboard use, strange choices have been made in what to do with the increased dimensions afforded to the system. The arrangement of the SATA storage bays is weirdly inconsistent, the decision to go for 6x 3.5″ and 2x 2.5″ (instead of just going ‘route 1’ and just opt for 8x 8.5″ SATA) is a stance choice in 2024 (as the focus on SSDs rapidly shifts away from 2.5″ to M.2 NVMe, onboard MoBos). The funnelling on cables on the system is very clear, the PCIe card frequency is high and the physical design and aesthetic appeal are better on the N4 than any other Jonsbo NAS case. But the reduced motherboard cavity space and it’s impact on optional rear fans, smaller CPU coolers and half-height PCIe cards is going to be a hurdle for more enterprising users! For under $100 (without delivery!), Jonsbo is still going to be the ‘go-to’ NAS case manufacturer in 2024 onwards, but the Jonsbo N4 is still a little more niche a proposal in terms of its physical appeal to a lot of users. A good DiY NAS Case, but make sure that you look into the N2 and N3 case first, as you might find more to love there!

Model: N4 (Black / White)

Dimensions: 286mm (W) x 300mm (D) x 228mm (H) / Material: 0.7mm Steel + Wood, Weight: 3.75kg

Storage: 6x 3.5″ HDD slots + 2x 2.5″ SSD slots

Motherboard: ITX / Micro-ATX

Ports: 1x Type-C USB, 1x USB 3.0 Type-A

PSU: SFX (up to 125mm in length) / Maximum CPU Cooler Height: ≤70mm

PCI Expansion: x4 , Maximum Graphics Card Length: ≤230mm

Cooling: 1x 120mm fan (built-in)

Check AliExpress HERECheck Amazon HERE


Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Packaging and Shipping Presentation

Arriving in a Jonsbo-branded case, much like other solutions by the brand, the N4 is currently only available on AliExpress. With a sub $100 price tag, it’s the delivery costs of around $40 to $50 that might surprise you. Eventually, this case will no doubt become more widely available across traditional e-commerce outlets, but at launch, this system seems to arrive at a comparative price point to the rest of the Jonsbo NAS enclosure family.

The page pretty much gives you all the information you’re going to need for an exclusively e-shop purchase. And, for something that most would largely assume would arrive in plain brown box packaging, the N4 retail package is actually surprisingly nice and provides a decent amount of detail.

The contents of the Jonsbo N4 retail package are pretty standard. The enclosure is encased in hard black foam, and the accessories are all included in a branded white accessory box. The unit I ordered online was unscathed, despite the shipping container having a few dents.

Emptying out the retail container and shipping box provides us with pretty much everything I expected. There is the unit itself, but also a fold-out A4 installation guide. There are numerous screws and cable ties for use during the installation.  And finally, there is the assortment of drive handles and rubber grommets. I will discuss these more later on, but that is pretty much everything you get with this system.

The system is not officially available for purchase pre-populated with a power supply, nor does it arrive with any SATA or Molex power cabling included and pre-attached. This is quite a bare-bones NAS enclosure, and alongside the obvious purchase of a motherboard, CPU, memory, and PSU, etc., don’t forget that you’re almost certainly going to need those SATA fan-out cables and possibly Molex power adapters.

Overall, I’m happy with what I’m getting here, and as long as you know that you’re getting a bare-bones NAS enclosure, there’s nothing to be unsatisfied with here. Let’s discuss the external design of the N4.

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Design

The Jonsbo N4 case is approximately the same height as the N2 but distinguishes itself by being the widest NAS enclosure from the brand, largely due to the support for the larger M-ATX motherboard cavity internally. Interestingly, this system manages to be nearly identical to most other eight-bay 3.5-inch SATA NAS cases, while technically being a six-bay case traditionally.

There is ample passive ventilation throughout the entire NAS enclosure. Each side of the casing features a ventilation strip positioned beside the motherboard once installed, and the top panel also has a large ventilated area in the metal top cavity to assist warm air in naturally rising out of the case.

The design also introduces a real wood front panel purely for aesthetic reasons, not unlike the AUDHEID 8-bay case. It is surprisingly high quality, even if it largely offers minimal technical or operational improvement to the enclosure. The N4 is available in both black and white metal enclosure options, and although I have the black version here, I would argue the white version looks quite unique with the wooden panel motif. The wooden panel, situated directly in front of the motherboard internally, should not present any heat concerns due to significant passive ventilation around it and ample pathways for the internal CPU cooler to circulate air throughout the system behind this panel.

The storage area of the N4 is located behind a magnetically attached and ventilated front panel at the base of the system. This panel, easily removable via two finger hooks on either side of the enclosure, reveals the individual SATA storage bays of the N4. This vented and mesh dust-protected front panel is of reasonable quality and addresses the inconvenient access to storage bays seen in previous models from the brand.

Overall, I’m quite pleased with the small aesthetic improvements made in the Jonsbo NAS system over the units that preceded it. Drive bay access has been simplified, the stylistic integration of wood and metal paneling looks appealing, passive ventilation is well-designed and plentiful, and overall, the case feels high quality and not at all cheaply constructed. Let’s discuss the storage potential of the Jonsbo N4, as this has been a topic of heated debate ever since the brand announced this new enclosure.

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Storage

Discussing the storage capabilities of the Jonsbo N4 has, in the month since its launch, drawn a lot of debate. The system arrives with two tiers of storage: 3.5-inch SATA media and 2.5-inch SATA media. Unlike previous releases by the brand in this enclosure series, all storage media bays are directly accessible via the front of the casing. The first-generation system was a two-drive system, the N2 was a five 3.5” drive system, and the N3 was an eight-drive system. The N4, however, scales things back and arrives with six 3.5-inch SATA storage media bays.

Alongside these, we find two 2.5-inch SATA drive media bays. With the total storage separated in a grid of 4 + 4, this is a peculiar choice, as the use of 2.5-inch SATA SSDs has notably decreased in recent years. There’s a clear division in most storage circles: 3.5-inch SATA storage is used for low-priced, high-capacity storage, and M.2 NVMe SSD storage is chosen for high performance but low capacity. Given that the majority of modern motherboards these days come with at least one M.2 NVMe slot, traditionally used for an operating system SSD, the necessity of 2.5-inch SATA SSD bays in a 2024 NAS enclosure is up for debate!

The debate regarding the storage bays of the system is further exacerbated when you learn that only four of these bays support hot-swapping. Slots one, two, three, and four are all attached with a SATA/SAS backplane located at the rear of the enclosure.

Whereas, the other two 3.5-inch SATA and two 2.5-inch SATA are just empty physical cavities that will require the user to directly connect SATA cables from the motherboard, as well as introduce individual SATA power for each drive. The convenience of hot swapping without getting too up close and personal with the system components on the fly is a peculiar choice of storage deployment in a system released hot on the heels of the Jonsbo N2 and N3.

With the scale of the system’s physical width increased for its support of M-ITX motherboards, the N4 is similarly sized to the majority of other eight-bay NAS systems in the market. Yet, practically all other eight-bay NAS enclosures opt for traditional SATA trays that directly load onto a single 8-port internal backplane. It is an odd choice by the brand to opt for this style of drive insertion.

This is further exacerbated by Jonsbo’s continued decision to forgo the use of traditional storage media trays and instead opt for rubber handles and individual grommet drive screws for each physical drive. Not only does this mean that the installation of 2.5-inch SATA media in these larger bays requires an additional physical adapter, but the installation of the Jonsbo storage media drives with these handles has always felt clunky and poorly served when drives are being moved in and out of the system.

In Jonsbo’s defense, this approach is somewhat of a house style for the brand in many of their previous releases, and they do reduce operational vibration and noise compared to the insertion of metal trays. However, this decrease in drive vibration is somewhat minimal and arguably even less useful when using larger capacity or enterprise drives that are simply too mechanical and jam-packed with hardware to be suitably muted in operation anyway.

All in all, I find these rubber handles for drives reminiscent of something from the early 2000s of entry-level home server devices and feel completely out of place with the rest of the system’s arguably modern aesthetic.

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Internal

The Jonsbo N4 features three removable panels for accessing the bulk of the internal system framework. Additionally, several internal cavities/pathways guide cables between the installed motherboard and individual components. Given the relatively compact framework of the system, efficient cable management is paramount to prevent blocking active airflow. Although a bit of a tight fit, Jonsbo mostly pulls it off, albeit with a few questionable choices along the way.

The single 120mm fan is secured with four screws at each corner, and once removed, it allows for easy maintenance of the active cooling fan.

I find myself missing the dual-fan arrangement featured on the N3 model, especially since, short of a substantial CPU cooler, this is the only fan that can be installed in the system. There are no additional placement holes for optional fans.

The system has a PSU cavity that supports an SFX power supply, up to 125mm in height. An empty space above the PSU area is used for funneling cables from the front panel slots five through eight.

The rear fan area reveals four individual SATA connectors that require funneling additional SATA cables from, via either a fan-out cable or individually, into your chosen motherboard. The backplane is powered by a single Molex female input.

The front-mounted USB Type-A and USB Type-C ports connect to three individual F-panel connector cables that run directly behind the wooden section of the enclosure. The system lacks audio sockets and does not feature LEDs for the individual storage bays, presenting an understated case overall.

Removing the top panel is straightforward, done by unscrewing some screws at the rear of the enclosure. This reveals the space available for installing your ITX or MATX motherboard.

Screw points for mounting your motherboard are clearly identified with the letters M, I, or M/I – the latter indicating a shared screw point for either motherboard installation. The guidance holes for PSU power and SATA cabling are clear; however, it’s highly recommended to route these cables in advance of installing your motherboard as doing so afterward will be challenging.

This brings us to another area of the system that’s somewhat divisive. The height of the motherboard installation cavity is quite low, supporting only low-profile CPU coolers. While there are many impressive half-height CPU coolers available, and modern SOC processors often come with slim 1 to 2cm fan-assisted heatsinks, this limitation is notable.

Users often choose NAS cases that support MATX motherboards for the purpose of using more powerful CPUs, alongside the benefits of larger PCIe slots and more DIMM slots. This all necessitates more cooling, making the N4’s limited capacity for CPU coolers a bit puzzling.

Regarding MATX benefits, the system has slots for up to four individual PCIe cards. Realistically, most users will install one to two double-width cards. The system’s lower motherboard cavity height also means it only supports half-height PCIe cards, which should be fine for network interface cards or compact M.2 NVMe upgrade cards. However, modern graphics cards and larger PCIe upgrade cards will not fit.

Realistically, the majority of users interested in the Jonsbo N4 are likely looking for a system suited to multimedia, low to mid-level VM and container deployment, or simply to enhance their home lab. A smaller segment seeking to expand into AI, high graphical demands, or aggressive VM deployment might find the reduced PCIe card capacity limiting.

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Hardware Review – Conclusion and Verdict

I like the Jonsbo N4 NAS Case, but there is no denying that for so many reasons the N3 is a superior NAS enclosure. Earlier this year when the N4 was first announced, we made a comparison guide on the N2, N3 and N4 (HERE) and reached the conclusion that the N4 was arguably the most niche unit of the series so far, making us wonder if perhaps Jonsbo had got these numbers in the wrong order! Fast forward to now and when we have spent some time with the N4 case and that opinion has not changed at all! The N4 IS a good NAS case, but in efforts to support MATX motherboard use, strange choices have been made in what to do with the increased dimensions afforded to the system.

The arrangement of the SATA storage bays is weirdly inconsistent, the decision to go for 6x 3.5″ and 2x 2.5″ (instead of just going ‘route 1’ and just opt for 8x 8.5″ SATA) is a stance choice in 2024 (as the focus on SSDs rapidly shifts away from 2.5″ to M.2 NVMe, onboard MoBos). The funnelling on cables on the system is very clear, the PCIe card frequency is high and the physical design and aesthetic appeal are better on the N4 than any other Jonsbo NAS case. But the reduced motherboard cavity space and it’s impact on optional rear fans, smaller CPU coolers and half-height PCIe cards is going to be a hurdle for more enterprising users! For under $100 (without delivery!), Jonsbo are still going to be the ‘go-to’ NAS case manufacturer in 2024 onwards, but the Jonsbo N4 is still a little more niche a proposal in terms of its physical appeal to a lot of users. A good DiY NAS Case, but make sure that you look into the N2 and N3 case first, as you might find more to love there!

N2

Best for Low/Efficient NAS Deployment

Lowest Price Point

Smallest Physical Footprint

Smallest Storage Capacity

Only 1 PCIe Card Slot and Half Height

N3

Best for  a Power NAS Build + Bigger CPU Cooling

Largest Storage Capacity + Full Size PCIe Cards

Best Prosumer Deployment

BIG Size and oddly tall

Noisiest System of the Three

N4

Better MoBo Compatibility (MITX and MATX)

Best Size vs Storage Option + 4x PCIe Slots

Most Conventially Aesthetically Appealing

Most Expensive

PCIe Cards Must Be Half Height

======= Where To Buy? =======
$76 (Check Aliexpress HERE) $99.42 (Check Aliexpress HERE) $76.99 (Check Aliexpress HERE)
$149 (Check Amazon HERE) $170 (Check Amazon HERE) $199* (Check Amazon HERE)

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

UGREEN NAS Drive – Should You Buy?

Par : Rob Andrews
27 mars 2024 à 18:00

The UGREEN NAS Drives – Should You Back This Kickstarter?

The UGreen NAS series has recently been launched on Kickstarter, presenting an exciting opportunity for enthusiasts and potential users to engage with what the product promises. However, as with any product, especially those launched via crowdfunding platforms, it’s crucial to approach with a balanced perspective, recognizing both its strengths and potential limitations. In this context, the commentary highlights five appealing aspects of the UGreen NASync series and acknowledges five areas of concern or aspects that might be disappointing to some users. This nuanced approach is essential, especially when considering a product in its crowdfunding stage, distinct from a traditional retail purchase. Crowdfunding offers a unique set of risks and rewards, necessitating a careful approach from backers. For a comprehensive understanding, including detailed insights and analysis, it’s recommended to view the extensive one-hour review on YouTube and read the accompanying article for in-depth coverage of the UGreen NASync DXP4800 PLUS.

Important Links

  • The UGREEN NASync Kickstarter Page – HERE
  • UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS NAS Review (Video) HERE  (Written Review)HERE
  • UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS NAS Review (Should You Buy Video, Shorter) – HERE
  • UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Review – (Video) HERE – (Written Review) HERE

Reasons I LIKE the UGREEN NAS Drives

First, let’s discuss the really positive and impressive things about the UGREEN NASync series of devices.

The UGREEN NAS Have GREAT Hardware

You really can’t find fault, especially given the price, with the variety of hardware across the six versions of the UGreen NASync series. From an efficient and affordable N100 processor to a robust Pentium and a 10-core i5, the hardware range is impressive. Additionally, these systems come with 2.5G and 10G network connectivity, and some even offer Thunderbolt connectivity.

It’s the finer details that stand out: 8GB of DDR5 memory across the board, SD card slots in several models, and a compact Gen 4 SSD flash model featuring Wi-Fi 6E. The hardware spectrum UGreen offers in their debut series is truly remarkable.

UGREEN NAS Are Arriving With Good Design and Quality Build

The early prototypes of the DXP 4800 Plus and DXP480T showcase impressive build quality and construction. UGreen is evidently investing significantly in this new branch of their tech portfolio, a fact that is palpable in the devices’ build. With unique branding and a robust, predominantly metal construction, these systems feel sturdy. All internal components, including the motherboard and chip arrangement, are UGreen branded, featuring a custom UGreen kernel for the motherboard BIOS. This attention to detail ensures the system feels far from cheap, marking a strong entry into the NAS world with a product that seems exceptionally established.

The UGREEN Mobile Application is very, VERY Good!

You may have heard various opinions about the UGreen UGOS NAS software, which is currently in beta, coinciding with the launch of its crowdfunding campaign on Kickstarter. While actual product fulfillment might not occur until later in summer 2024, it’s worth delving into the mobile application aspect of their software. UGreen has prioritized the development of their mobile application, making it a comprehensive NAS management tool that stands out in terms of usability. Unlike many NAS software solutions that struggle to adapt desktop functionalities into a mobile format, resulting in a compromised user experience, the UGreen NAS Sync mobile app for Android and iOS is exceptionally well-crafted. It offers extensive control over system features without overwhelming users with complexity. This approach marks a significant departure from merely offering a web portal API in a less reliable mobile app form. UGreen’s investment in developing a potent and user-friendly mobile tool showcases their commitment to enhancing user experience, positioning it highly even when compared to industry leaders like Synology.

UGREEN is an Established Brand, NOT an Unknown or Startup

Unlike many startup and crowdfunded network-attached storage (NAS) solutions I’ve discussed on this channel (check out my history of NAS Kickstarter and Indiegogo articles), UGreen is an established brand in the tech sector. Having been around for nearly 14 years and already known for peripherals, this marks their first foray into network-attached storage. It’s important to recognize that UGreen brings existing brand recognition, a well-developed supply chain, support network, and production experience accustomed to worldwide distribution. A major challenge for many crowdfunded products, not just NAS, is that even great ideas can falter due to production and distribution issues. Having an established brand behind a product can often mitigate these risks, providing a level of assurance seldom seen with traditional indie startups.

The UGREEN NAS Range Are Very Affordable

I’ve already mentioned this, but it’s worth reiterating the exceptionally competitive price point across all six devices in the UGreen NASync portfolio. This pricing strategy is noteworthy both for early crowdfunding backers and for the retail recommended price (RRP) once these devices hit traditional retail channels. The brand’s own website even offers a staggering 40% discount, suggesting these products might be positioned as loss leaders to make a significant impact in the NAS market or that their profit margins are remarkably high. This pricing strategy makes the UGreen NASync series hard to overlook compared to other solutions. While not the cheapest, the pricing is balanced enough to cover production and distribution costs without deterring potential buyers who might consider more established market alternatives.

Specification DXP2800

DXP4800

DXP4800 Plus

DXP6800 Pro

DXP8800 Plus

DXP480T Plus

Kickstarter Page HERE HERE HERE HERE HERE HERE
Kickstarter Launch $239.99 $359.99 $419.99 $599.99 $899.99 $479.99
MSRP $399 $559 $699 $999 $1499 $779
Operating System UGOS Pro UGOS Pro UGOS Pro UGOS Pro UGOS Pro UGOS Pro
CPU Model N100 N100 8505 1235u 1235u 1235u
CPU Brand Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel
CPU Architecture X86 12th Gen N Series X86 12th Gen N Series X86 12th Gen Intel Pentium Gold X86 12th Gen Intel Core i5 X86 12th Gen Intel Core i5 X86 12th Gen Intel Core i5
Cores/Threads 4/4 4/4 5/6 10/12 10/12 10/12
Memory (RAM) 8GB DDR5 8GB DDR5 8GB DDR5 8GB DDR5 8GB DDR5 8GB DDR5
ODECC Support Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Expandable RAM (max) 16GB 16GB 64GB 64GB 64GB 64GB
Flash Memory (System Disk) eMMC 32GB eMMC 32GB SSD 128GB SSD 128GB SSD 128GB SSD 128GB
SATA Drive Bays 2 4 4 6 8 0
M.2 SSD Drive Slots 2 2 2 2 2 4

Things About the UGREEN NAS Drives That I DO NOT Like

While the five positive aspects of the UGreen NAS product are commendable, it’s essential to approach with a balanced view. In the spirit of thorough evaluation, attention must be turned to aspects of the UGreen NAS product that may not meet expectations or could be considered drawbacks. This critical examination helps ensure a well-rounded perspective before making an informed decision about the product.

The UGREEN NAS are ONLY Available in Germany and the United States

Why on earth is this product only being initially provided in Germany and the United States? I can appreciate that it takes a lot of work to provide a product globally at launch, and even the biggest brands in the tech world may, from time to time, stagger their release schedule and geographical release strategy – resulting in different regions getting their products earlier or later than others. However, UGreen already has an established product availability in numerous other regions. Additionally, this is a crowdfunded product, and one could argue that they want to get as many bums on seats as possible! Limiting the scope of availability for this product at launch to just these two regions has definitely annoyed a lot of users in the UK, France, Australia, Canada… the list goes on and on! Additionally, remember that 40% discount I mentioned earlier for the early crowdfunding backers? Imagine hearing good things about a product and finding out you can get it at a comparatively low price compared to established solutions in the market, but then find out that you are living in one of the regions that isn’t supported and when you eventually can get hold of the product, chances are you are getting it much closer to the RRP! How annoying is that! With Germany just a hop, skip, and a jump away from many other neighbouring countries in Europe, this is a bitter pill to swallow!

3rd Party NAS OS Support is COMPLICATED

The installation of third-party operating systems on the UGreen NAS is a complex topic. Recently, a NASCompares Q&A highlighted users’ concerns about the warranty when installing systems like TrueNAS or UnRAID. UGreen initially stated that installing a third-party OS would void the 2-year warranty, frustrating many. However, discussions at UGreen may lead to a policy allowing third-party OS installations under certain conditions without voiding the warranty. Yet, this has not been finalized. Additionally, installing a third-party OS is challenging due to the custom UGreen BIOS, and attempts to install alternative operating systems have faced significant hurdles, including system reboots, suggesting potential hardware or software safeguards against such modifications. This uncertainty and technical complexity have left many users concerned about the feasibility and warranty implications of using third-party operating systems on UGreen’s NAS systems.

26/03/24 – Update on the use of 3rd Party OS’ on UGREEN NAS with hardware, with regard to warranty*: “The Ugreen team confirms that whatever is promised in their warranty policy will not change, which only covers the hardware. They also mention that there is a risk of damage if you install a third-party OS, including data loss and compatibility issues, etc.” – Ugreen Representative, 26/3/24

NOTE – If you want to hear more about how it went installing a 3rd party OS on the UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS NAS, Watch the video HERE, or in the embedded video below (it’s been set to the correct section):

The UGOS UGREEN NAS Software is Still in BETA and Not Finished

I’ve already mentioned this, but it’s worth reiterating. Currently, the UGreen NAS software isn’t ‘finished’. During my one-month review period, UGreen pushed numerous software updates that improved performance and stability. Yet, key software features are missing, such as two-factor authentication, encrypted volumes support, WORM support, container or virtualization apps, and Plex or Emby applications. While the software is still in beta and not officially launching for many months, allowing room for improvements, it’s somewhat frustrating, especially when the mobile app appears polished in contrast to the desktop experience’s inconsistencies.

10GbE Performance was not as great – Subject to Change Later in Development (I Hope)

This is something that will hopefully be addressed as the product undergoes further development through crowdfunding, but it needs highlighting. The prototype I received offered moderate performance over external 10GBE, and while internal performance of the M.2 NVMe drives improved with updates, optimal performance was achieved using SSH rather than native file transmission. Tweaks to enhance network connectivity, like adjusting the jumbo frame/MTU, are unavailable in the current software beta, contributing to an inconsistent experience.

UGREEN-DXP4800-PLUS-1-NVMe-SSD-10GbE-AJA-PERFORMANCE

Additionally, power consumption was about 15 to 20% higher than anticipated, a significant figure considering the system’s robust specifications and storage media.

Not Clear WHY UGREEN Opted for Crowdfunding via Kickstarter

This is probably the biggest problem that users have with UGreen and its NAS system being launched the way it is – why on earth is an established brand launching on crowdfunding? Kickstarter is predominantly targeted towards indie startup companies and those that are trying to launch a new product into a market to gauge interest and find an audience. There is an argument that UGreen, an Eastern company who have yet to formally release a network-attached storage solution, could definitely see the benefit in utilizing both the tools and the relative financial safety afforded to crowdfunding to gauge the interest of a product at launch and ensure financial efficiency. However, to use crowdfunding, but also launch six different SKUs, for a brand that’s been in the tech world for more than a decade is super weird! I get it, most of their prior technological experience has been more in accessories and adapters, so there is an argument that they don’t want to risk too much on a new venture. But I personally would have recommended that they launch just two SKUs via traditional retail purchasing, then launch the rest of the series as a phase 2, if interest in the initial two products is good enough. The 4-bay desktop DXP4800 Plus and DXP480T would have made great options as the market is still crying out for solid 4-bay NAS systems and 2023/2024 has already seen several prominent NVMe flash NAS systems arriving for home and prosumer use – the demand is already clearly there!

Conclusion – Should You Buy/Back the UGREEN NAS?

BOTTOM LINE – The UGREEN NASYnc DXP4800 Plus does not feel ‘finished’ yet and still needs more time in the over, but UGREEN have been very clear with me that this product is not intended for release and fulfilment till summer 2024 and improvements, optimization and product completion is still in progress. Judging the UGREEN NAS systems, when what we have is a pre-release and pre-crowdfunding sample, was always going to be tough. The DXP4800 PLUS is a very well put-together NAS solution, arriving with a fantastic launching price point (arguably even at its RRP for the hardware on offer). UGREEN has clearly made efforts here to carve out their own style, adding their own aesthetic to the traditional 4-bay server box design that plagues NAS boxes at this scale. Equally, although they are not the first brand to consider Kickstarter/Crowdfunding for launching a new product in the NAS/personal-cloud sector, this is easily one of the most confident entries I have seen yet. The fact that this system arrives on the market primarily as a crowdfunded solution (though almost certainly, if successful, will roll out at traditional retail) is definitely going to give users some pause for thought. Equally, the UGREEN NAS software, still in beta at the time of writing, although very responsive and nailing down the basics, still feels like it needs more work to compete with the bigger boys at Synology and QNAP. Hardware architecture, scalability, and performance are all pretty impressive, though the performance of the Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe slots didn’t seem to hit the numbers I was expecting. Perhaps a question of PCIe bottlenecking internally, or a need for further tweaking and optimization as the system continues development. Bottom line, with expected software updates to roll out closer to launch and fulfillment, such as an expanded App center and mobile client, the UGREEN DXP4800 Plus is definitely a device worth keeping an eye on in the growing Turnkey and semi-DIY NAS market. As an alternative to public cloud services, this is a no-brainer and worth the entry price point. As an alternative to established Turnkey NAS Solutions, we will hold off judgment till it is publicly released.

SOFTWARE - 6/10
HARDWARE - 9/10
PERFORMANCE - 6/10
PRICE - 9/10
VALUE - 8/10


7.6
PROS
👍🏻Exceptional Hardware for the Price
👍🏻4 HDDs + 2x Gen 4x4 M.2 in 1 box under $400
👍🏻Good Balanced CPU choice in the Pentium Gold 8505
👍🏻10GbE and 2.5GbE as standard
👍🏻An SD Card Slot (wielrd rare!)
👍🏻10/10 Build Quality
👍🏻Great Scalability
👍🏻Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
👍🏻Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
👍🏻Established Brand entering the NAS Market
👍🏻Not too noisy (comparatively)
👍🏻Very Appealing retail package+accessories
CONS
👎🏻10GbE Performance was underwhelming
👎🏻Crowdfunding choice is confusing
👎🏻Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
👎🏻non-UGREEN PSU is unexpected
👎🏻

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS – Which Should You Buy in 2024?

Par : Rob Andrews
25 mars 2024 à 18:00

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS – Which Should You Buy

Buying your first network-attached storage device can be really intimidating! If you have spent the better part of a decade storing your personal or business data on public cloud services or in a drawer full of USB drives, but have now taken the grown-up decision to go ahead and migrate over to your own private network-attached storage (NAS). You might have done this for reasons of cost, centralization or perhaps for security, whatever the reason for your data migration, there is simply no denying that the world of NAS can be a fraction complex and confusing early doors. Like any kind of modern computer appliance, you want to make sure you buy right the first time and when it comes to choosing between two of the latest generations of Synology NAS devices, these two incredibly similar four-bay devices might be two of the most different solutions I have ever compared. The Synology DS423+ is a home and small business-focused compact NAS designed to leverage an affordable price point between reasonable hardware and reasonable software and abilities. The slightly older Synology DS923+ (by 6+ months), on the other hand, has much of a high and even in some places entry enterprise-level focus about its architecture and is needless to say the more expensive of the two. Nevertheless, both of these Synology NAS devices can be picked up for around $450 to $600 (without drives), the contrast between their pricing, are actually very different beasts. Therefore, for users that don’t quite know their AMD embedded from their Celeron integrated processors, or who aren’t sure of the benefits that ECC can bring, today I want to compare the Synology DS423+ and Synology DS923+ and help you decide which one best deserves your data!

Just before we get into the meat and potatoes of this comparison, it is worth highlighting that regardless of whether you buy the Synology DS923+ or DS423+, you are guaranteed to get a system that can perform all of the following:

  • Both units feature x86 processors, which allow a wide degree of app/services to run well and are a good price vs hardware balance
  • Both the DS923+ and DS423+ are constructed of plastic desktop compact chassis, thereby reducing power consumption, noise and heat generated
  • Both can Stream 1080p HD or 4K media, with superior performance natively and mid-range performance in Plex
  • Both the Synology DS923+ and DS423+ NAS support AI-supported photo and ‘thing’ recognition supported to a very high degree from the free branded software included
  • For Business users who currently enjoy the use of Google Workspace or Office 365, both of these NAS provide excellent means to backup your mass cloud accounts (as well as natively sync, dupe and configure rules on the fly)
  • Both the DS423+ NAS and DS923+ NAS support snapshots, for more incremental and version protecting failsafe in efforts to protect you from Malware and Ransomware attacks, by allowing multi-versioning storage history to browse through and restore
  • Both units are DLNA certified so can be accessed, browsed and played from by popular DLNA devices, such as Amazon Firestick, Alexa, Google Home Chromecast, Apple TV, Bose, Sonos, iPads, etc, as well as connectivity between these platforms with IFTTT
  • Both are multi-bay, RAID enabled devices NAS devices that support JBOD, RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6 and RAID 10 (as well as Synology Hybrid RAID too for their Plus series range), though it is worth highlighting the DS923+ is the only one that supports an expansion and therefore also can support RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10 and SHR-2 over an expansion (more on that later)
  • Both devices run on their own proprietary operating system that can be accessed remotely or locally. These include regular updates to the firmware, security patches, applications and more. Ranging from multimedia, home and multi-tiered backup applications, to more business end tools such as Surveillance software, Virtual Machine deployment and business-class backup and synchronization tools.
  • Both the DS423+ and DS923+ use and can be accessed equally by a multitude of mobile applications such as DS File, DS Video, DS Photo, DSCam and DS Music that are created by and constantly improved by Synology.
  • Both NAS are completely compatible with Windows, Android and Mac systems, as well as acting as a bring between software platforms to share and distribute files for migration and file sync]
  • Both units can be used as a mail and/or business servers, providing excellent 3rd party CRM and first-party CMS systems, as well as the fantastic Synology collaboration Suite of applications Chat, Drive, Mail, Calendar, Office and Active Backup Suite
  • Both systems will support DSM 7.1 or DSM 7.2 out the box, as well as support software updates (security and feature) for many years moving forward
  • Both systems support the Synology Surveillance Station applications, support numerous cameras and arrive with 2 camera licenses with your purchase

But you didn’t come to this comparison page to find out what they had in common, you wanted to know what makes them different and which one best suits your needs, so let’s crack on with this comparison.

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS – Price and Value

Now, for those of you that are keeping a very close eye on the budget, it will already be clear to you that the Synology DS423+ is the lower-priced NAS of the two, by quite a considerable margin! Arriving, depending on where you are in the world, for around $449 to $499, it will immediately look more appealing to those on a tight budget when compared against the $549 to $599 of the DS923+. And that is before you’ve gone ahead and purchased any storage media too, so that’s saving of $100 to $150 could go a long way to further bolstering your network-attached storage setup. So, if the most important thing to you right now is remaining within a tight budget, then it might be worth seeing to read the rest of this article as when comparing DS423+ and DS923+, we have to look considerably more at the subject of value, not price. Price. Both of these devices arrive with the same software, Synology DSM 7.2, as well as both systems being two drive NAS solutions that support nearly identical ranges of storage media too, but more on that later. In terms of physical size, the range of components, they are pretty darn similar at a casual glance. However, it is in terms of the individual hardware components and scalability where the Synology DS923+ shows its worth, which we will cover shortly in the hardware section. But at least in terms of numerical value, the Synology DS423+ carries the lead. However, the reality isn’t quite that simple:

This is because the Synology DS923+ was released approx than half a year earlier than the DS423+ (Nov 2022 vs April 2023) and because of its wider availability and longer presence in the market, it has been featured in numerous special offers throughout that time. We saw this near $500 NAS on a few considerably impressive special offers throughout Amazon Prime day and other smaller eShop-specific events. So, yes, the DS423+ is the lower-priced NAS of the two, but do make a point of checking your local online retailer to see if the DS923+ is on special offer right now!

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS – Hardware and Connections

The hardware architecture of the DS423+ and DS923+ clearly have two very different target audiences in mind. The DS423+ has more of a home and multimedia feel about it, while the DS923+ feels substantially more like a business solution. This is reflected in numerous areas such as the distinct differences in CPU, memory specifications, and potential for growth. Even if you were to take into account the affordability of the DS423+, it has to be said that in the majority of hardware available, the DS923+ is significantly more powerful and scalable in practically every way. Here is a brief summary of the key hardware highlights of either system, side-by-side:

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS Hardware Comparison
Synology NAS
Amazon Price: $479 (Amazon 25/02/24)

$599 (Amazon 25/02/24)

Processor model Intel Celeron J4125 (2019 Gen) AMD Ryzen R1600 (2020 Gen)
processor architecture 64-bit 64-bit
processor clock 4-core 2.0 (base frequency) / 2.7 (burst frequency) GHz 2-core 2.6 (base frequency) / 3.1 (max overclock) GHz
Integrated Graphics Yes (250-750Mhz) No
Hardware encryption engine (AES-NI) Yes Yes
system memory 2 GB DDR4 non-ECC 4 GB DDR4 ECC
Pre-installed memory modules Yes 4GB (4GB x 1) via SODIMM
Total number of memory slots 1 2
Maximum memory capacity 6 GB (2 GB + 4 GB) 32GB (16GB x 2)
The maximum number of disk slots for an expansion unit N/A 7 (DX517 x 1)
M.2 drive bay N/A 2 (NVMe, PCIe 3×1)
Compatible Disk Type
  • 3.5″ SATA HDD
  • 2.5″ SATA SSD
  • 3.5″ SATA HDD
  • 2.5″ SATA SSD
  • M.2 2280 NVMe SSD
Disk hot-plug support* Yes Yes

So first and foremost, we need to discuss the main differences between the CPUs available here. The Intel Celeron found inside the DS423+ is a four-core, four-thread processor with a clock speed of 2.0 GHz that can be burst to 2.7 GHz when needed. However, despite the age of this CPU, which was released towards the end of 2019, it is the integrated graphics of this processor that gives it a slight edge for some users in terms of NAS deployment- especially those looking at multimedia use for their system. For users that are looking at the manipulation of graphical data, or more commonly are using the NAS as a multimedia server and wish to convert dense multimedia into something more manageable locally (for example, converting a dense 4K file into a much smaller and portable version to watch on the phone whilst commuting to work, on the fly), integrated graphics allow the NAS to perform this task with much lower overall resource consumption.

Thanks to it having a more specialized tool to get this job done. The embedded Ryzen R1600 processor on the other hand, lacks the integrated graphics and is a dual-core processor instead of a quad-core. However, it substantially makes up for this by being a much more powerful dual-core processor, with four threads that allow the system to assign system resources in a similar way to that of having multiple cores. Equally, the clock speed is noticeably higher here with the DS923+ CPU having a 2.6 GHz base power that can be burst when needed to 3.1 GHz. It is true that in cases of graphical manipulation or multimedia conversion, the AMD CPU here will be far less efficient and capable. However, in practically every other way, it is superior to that of the J4125 inside the DS423+. And if you are more concerned with traditional file transfer speeds internally and externally, the DS923+ will comfortably be the better-performing NAS.

 

The CPU choices in the DS423+ and DS923+ also result in very different memory architectures in each device, which will undoubtedly result in different scalability in the long term. The DS423+ arrives with 2GB of 2666Mhz memory, soldered to the main controller board, which can be further expanded via an available SODIMM memory slot to 6 GB total. This may be a little disheartening when you find out that the CPU here is actually capable of supporting 8 GB maximum memory. However, due to that initial 2GB memory being fixed internally, you cannot officially exceed 6 GB physically. This shortfall is considerably magnified when you bring into comparison the DS723’s memory structure. It arrives with 4GB of DDR4 3200Mhz memory which can be expanded to a whopping 32 GB total across two available SODIMM slots. Additionally, the system arrives with error-correcting code (ECC) memory, which ensures that data that passes through the memory during write operations will have its integrity checked by a separate module on the memory of the system. If any irregularities or inconsistencies are spotted, that data will be repaired. This goes a long way to reassure any doubts around the integrity of long-term archival data and susceptibility to things like bit rot. This is one of the main reasons why the DS923+ is considered much more of a business solution overall.

Much like the memory choices by Synology in these two NAS devices, the ports and connections of them both are similar, but one is definitely more scalable than the other. Both systems arrive with standard gigabit ethernet connectivity, with two available ports that each will provide up to a maximum 109 megabytes per second. Both systems also arrive with USB 3 connectivity, but it is only 5GB gen 1 USB. However, it is from here onward that the DS723 massively upscales things:

Model ID Synology DS423+ Synology DS923+
Synology NAS
RJ-45 1GbE LAN port* 2 (Supports Link Aggregation / Failover) 2 (Supports Link Aggregation / Failover)
USB 3.2 Gen 1 port* 2 2
eSATA port 0 1
USB Copy Yes (inc. Physical Button) Yes
PCIe expansion N/A 1 x Gen3 x2 LAN card slot
system fan 92 mm x 92 mm x 2 pcs 92 mm x 92 mm x 2 pcs
fan mode
  • full speed mode
  • low temperature mode
  • silent mode
  • full speed mode
  • low temperature mode
  • silent mode
Front panel LED indicators with adjustable brightness Yes Yes
Noise value* 19.8dB(A) 22.9 dB(A)
wake on lan Yes Yes
Power Supply / Transformer 90W 100W
AC input voltage 100V to 240V AC 100V to 240V AC
current frequency 50/60 Hz, single frequency 50/60 Hz, single frequency
Power consumption 28.3 W (access)
8.45 W (disk hibernation)
35.51 W (access)
11.52 W (disk hibernation)

For a start, the DS923+ features an eSATA external port that is used to connect the official Synology 5-bay expansion device, the DX517. This means that while the DS423+ has a maximum long-term capacity of four SATA drives, the DS923+ allows you to expand your storage down the line by an additional five SATA bays (so 9 Bays total). This can be done gradually and this storage can either mirror the original NAS or extend the storage pool across both devices.

Scalability and expandability do not stop there though, with the DS923+ also having the option to add a network adapter upgrade module (the E10G22-T1-MINI) to increase your network bandwidth to 10GbE. This is going to be incredibly useful for users who plan on taking advantage of SSDs or plan on having a much busier network environment between the NAS and multiple users and tasks at any given time. And it doesn’t stop there! Though BOTH systems also features two SSD bays on its base for installing M.2 2280 SSD modules (which can be used for caching or as raw storage pools, depending on which drive you use), the DS423+ is a Gen 2 PCIe lane system, whilst the DS923+ is a Gen 3 system – resulting in double the bandwidth per lane (ultimately, the difference between 500MB/s max per SSD on the DS423+ and 1,000MB/s on the DS923+). This is a feature that, although growing more common across Synology’s NAS portfolio, it is still unavailable on many of their lower tier/affordable systems (such as the DS224+) and, alongside the lack of storage expansion support, the gen2 speeds on these bays will place limits the storage potential long term on the more affordable NAS.

Finally, we need to discuss storage media compatibility, as this has grown to be another thing that has changed the way in which a user can populate their NAS quite a lot in recent years. On the list of storage media that they are prepared to verify as compatible with their systems. Although technically, one could say that any SATA media drive would be compatible with a SATA NAS, there are still a few incredibly isolated examples of compatibility, durability and stability. Synology requires that all drives need to be officially checked and verified before they’re prepared to add them to their list in order to truly guarantee that a user will get the promised Synology experience from their hardware with that media. As questionable as this might sound, the result is that the list of compatible storage media for both of these devices, despite their incredible similarities, is actually pretty darn different. Take a closer look at the slideshow below of compatible HDDs from WD and Seagate on these two NAS systems (from 21st July 2023) and see if you can spot an odd inconsistency:

In the case of the DS423+, we see a smaller pool of supported storage media, as well as a lower list of larger capacity drives being featured also. The DS923+, on the other hand, seemingly has a larger pool of more high capacity drives added and available to it, as well as a larger range of Synology’s own drives available for use with that system that includes the higher end options in the HAT5300 range. Synology has clearly prioritized higher-end drives for more advanced Synology systems, but for those that like to use their system clearly and rigidly within the defined parameters of a brand to maintain their warranty/guarantee, this is going to be a little disheartening to see the smaller pool of verified compatible storage media on the more affordable NAS solution. This is something that may well change over time as more drives are added to verified compatibility lists, but Synology has not exactly been putting their foot on the gas here. Given how close these two systems have been released side by side and the large disparity between their compatibility lists, I can’t see a huge amount of change happening anytime soon. It is absolutely no surprise that the more expensive Synology NAS has a better degree of hardware options in the long term. Though, it should be highlighted that a lot of the real benefits available in the DS723 are optional extras, long-term scalability and upgrades that are not necessarily available in the default model. It could be very easily argued that you are paying for entry to then pay extra for delivering upgrades, SSD upgrades, storage scalability, and increasing your memory years from now. Nevertheless, the fact that the baseline memory is ECC and the AMD CPU is indeed more powerful in most ways, does make up some of that additional cost and ultimately mean that in terms of hardware and connectivity, the DS923+ is the better of the two.

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS – Software and Services

At the risk of being incredibly repetitious, both of these devices are remarkably similar in what they can do in Synology’s premium DSM software platform, but the scalability and scope provided by the DS923+ inevitably leads to that more expensive system, ultimately giving you just more resources with which DSM can utilize. In terms of the actual range of applications, services supported on either system and scope for use right out of the box, both the DS423+ and DS923+ have got more than enough to run every single available app and tool available in DSM 7.2. Despite their rather modest scale, both systems can run multiple virtual machines, host a fantastically capable surveillance solution with numerous cameras, both can provide an excellent Plex media server experience (with a slight edge to the DS423+ in terms of conversions and transcoding when needed), and in terms of backups, both systems support the full range of services from Hyper Backup and Active Backup Suite. If you are a small business or just a small group of users who are going to be interacting with either of these NAS units fairly regularly, you’re going to have a largely identical experience in either one of these two systems using the baseline default hardware. However, things will change as soon as you start moving into larger simultaneous access, more high-volume application exchanges between the system and client hardware, and the scope of each one of those individual processes growing over time. In terms of the escalation of accessing the services of DSM and long-term future-proofing of a system running at top speed, despite growing requirements and demands of the system, the DS923+ comfortably wins.

Synology NAS Synology DS423+ Synology DS923+
Maximum single volume capacity* 108TB 108TB
Maximum number of storage spaces 64 64
M.2 SSD volume support* Yes Yes
SSD Read/Write Cache (White Paper) Yes Yes
SSD TRIM Yes Yes
Support RAID disk array type
  • Synology Hybrid RAID
  • Basic
  • JBOD
  • RAID 0
  • RAID 1
  • RAID 5
  • RAID 6
  • RAID 10
  • Synology Hybrid RAID
  • Basic
  • JBOD
  • RAID 0
  • RAID 1
  • RAID 5
  • RAID 6
  • RAID 10
file agreement SMB/AFP/NFS/FTP/WebDAV SMB/AFP/NFS/FTP/WebDAV
Maximum simultaneous SMB/AFP/FTP connections 500 1000
Maximum number of simultaneous SMB/AFP/FTP connections (with extended memory) 1500 2000
Windows Access Control List (ACL) Integration Yes Yes
NFS Kerberos authentication Yes Yes
Maximum number of local user accounts 2048 2048
Maximum number of local groups 256 256
Maximum number of shared folders 256 512
Maximum Shared Folder Sync Tasks 8 16
VMware vSphere with VAAI N/A Yes
Windows Server 2022 N/A Yes
Citrix Ready N/A Yes
OpenStack N/A Yes
Media Server Yes Yes
DLNA compatible Yes Yes
Synology Photos Yes Yes
face recognition Yes Yes
Snapshot Replication Yes Yes
The maximum number of snapshots supported by a single shared folder 1024 1024
Maximum number of system snapshots 65536 65536
Surveillance Station Yes Yes
The maximum number of cameras supported (camera authorization is required) 40 (including 2 sets of free licenses 40 (including 2 sets of free licenses
Frames per second (FPS) (H.264) 1200 FPS @ 720p (1280×720)
800 FPS @ 1080p (1920×1080)
350 FPS @ 3M (2048×1536)
280 FPS @ 5M (2591×1944)
170 FPS @ 4K (3840×2160)
1200 FPS @ 720p (1280×720)
1050 FPS @ 1080p (1920×1080)
600 FPS @ 3M (2048×1536)
360 FPS @ 5M (2591×1944)
200 FPS @ 4K (3840×2160)
Frames per second (FPS) (H.265) 1200 FPS @ 720p (1280×720)
1200 FPS @ 1080p (1920×1080)
600 FPS @ 3M (2048×1536)
480 FPS @ 5M (2591×1944)
200 FPS @ 4K (3840×2160)
1200 FPS @ 720p (1280×720)
1200 FPS @ 1080p (1920×1080)
1000 FPS @ 3M (2048×1536)
600 FPS @ 5M (2591×1944)
300 FPS @ 4K (3840×2160)
Synology Drive Yes Yes
Recommended number of clients that can sync simultaneously 350 (the number of devices that can be connected at the same time when the recommended number of stored files is reached) 350 (the number of devices that can be connected at the same time when the recommended number of stored files is reached)
Recommended number of files to store 5,000,000 (Applicable to files indexed or belonging to Synology Drive , files accessed through other protocols, please refer to the file service in the above field) 5,000,000 (Applicable to files indexed or belonging to Synology Drive , files accessed through other protocols, please refer to the file service in the above field)
Synology Office Yes Yes
Maximum number of users 1200 1200
Video Station Yes Yes
Virtual Machine Manager Yes Yes
Recommended number of virtual machines 2 (see more) 4 (see more)
Recommended number of Virtual DSMs (licensing required) 2 (including 1 set of free licenses) 4 (including 1 set of free licenses)
VPN Server Yes Yes
Maximum number of connections 40 40
Synology High Availability Yes Yes
log center Yes Yes
Number of logs received per second 800 800
Backup folders and packages Yes Yes
backup the whole system Yes Yes
Remark Full system backup requires DSM 7.2 or later. Full system backup requires DSM 7.2 or later.
Maximum number of Hybrid Share folders 10 10

Notwithstanding that the system has a much higher clock speed CPU that, despite only being a dual-core processor, features a four thread architecture with DSM, allowing a lot of the spreading of resources normally associated with cores to be made available with vCPU allocation (containers, virtual machines and just natively). Then there is the scope for the larger overall capacity available to be upgraded towards in terms of memory, with the rather modest 6GB of memory on the DS423+ looking quite underwhelming when compared against the whopping 32 GB maximum memory that is scalable on the DS923+. That ultimately adds up to the more expensive NAS system having a better opportunity to grow alongside a more demanding data storage network of connected devices and users over time. And we haven’t even touched on the performance benefit in DSM and all of the first and third party applications when we factor in support of Gen3 SSDs for caching or storage pools in the DS923+, both of which are going to allow much better, long-term utilization and overall, a much smoother experience for a considerably longer amount of time than that of the DS423+. Ultimately, if you think your utilization of the NAS is going to grow steadily and increasingly over time, the DS923+ is the better choice here in terms of software, in and out of DSM.

Synology DS423+ vs DS923+ NAS – Conclusion and Verdict

Unsurprisingly, what we have here is an old-fashioned case of getting what you pay for. The DS423+ is a very solid, and reliable NAS solution and is definitely more than capable of running the bulk of modern NAS hardware needs, also, remaining pretty flexible in the resources available to it on day one to get the job done. Equally, for home users and particularly those seeking a more flexible approach to multimedia, the DS423+ does bring a decent amount of bang for buck when you compare it against the bulk of other Synology solutions in the brand’s portfolio. But it just pales in comparison to the sheer scope of scalability, upgrade options and flexibility long-term that the DS923+ provides. And regardless of whether you’re a business user or a home user that may perhaps be looking to do something more aggressive with their storage down the line, the DS923+ justifies a lot of the extra expense, simply by the weight of it having that ECC memory, twice the default memory on day 1, Gen3 SSD NVMe storage options, expandability, 10G as an optional extra and the scale of how far you can upgrade the memory. As mentioned earlier, we have to at least acknowledge that a lot of these advantages that the DS923+ presents compared with the DS423+ are ones that you will only really take advantage of if you spend a little bit more money, but having the option for that scalability down the line for many users is going to be worth the investment on day one. Side by side, in most cases, the DS923+ will comfortably outperform the DS423+ even in the default model, so you still aren’t losing out just because you’re paying extra for upgrade options you may not use later down the line.

Synology NAS
Amazon Price: Synology DS423+ NAS

$479 (Amazon 25/02/24)

Synology DS923+ NAS

$599 (Amazon 25/02/24)

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS NAS Review

Par : Rob Andrews
22 mars 2024 à 15:00

UGREEN NASync DXP4800 PLUS Review (Pre-Release)

With many newcomers stepping into the network-attached storage arena, aiming to compete with established giants like Synology and QNAP, UGREEN’s entry is one of the most confident I’ve seen to date. UGREEN, a brand that has existed for quite some time in the computer accessories arena, seems to have a head start over other brands trying to enter the private consumer cloud and entry-level business market. The NASync series, also known as the DXP series, features an unusually large number of SKUs at launch, offering seven different configurations of storage capacity, internal hardware, and external connectivity. In a somewhat unconventional move, the brand has opted to use the crowdfunding site Kickstarter to launch its new product range. Although crowdfunding for NAS solutions was once rare, by 2024, several mid to high-profile crowdfunded NAS solutions have emerged with varying degrees of success. Predominantly East Asian-based brands often utilize Kickstarter to introduce their products to a Western audience, and UGREEN is doubling down on this strategy. Today, we’re examining the DXP4800 Plus, a 4-bay prosumer solution aiming to change expectations for server value. It boasts high-demand features like a powerful Intel CPU, DDR5 memory, Gen SSD storage, 10GbE, and flexible OS usage. There’s a lot to like here, but is this brand’s first foray into NAS storage worth your investment? And should Synology and QNAP be concerned?

Important – The UGREEN DXP4800 Plus NAS is still in the early stages of crowdfunding. The unit provided for review by UGREEN might not represent the finished product if/when crowdfunding is concluded and eventual fulfillment begins. UGREEN is an already long-established and trusted brand, but nevertheless, it is important to keep in mind that this is still a product that is initially being made available via crowdfunding and therefore an element of additional care is always advised, compared with a comparable product purchased via traditional retail outlets.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Quick Conclusion

BOTTOM LINE – The UGREEN NASYnc DXP4800 Plus does not feel ‘finished’ yet and still needs more time in the over, but UGREEN have been very clear with me that this product is not intended for release and fulfilment till summer 2024 and improvements, optimization and product completion is still in progress. Judging the UGREEN NAS systems, when what we have is a pre-release and pre-crowdfunding sample, was always going to be tough. The DXP4800 PLUS is a very well put-together NAS solution, arriving with a fantastic launching price point (arguably even at its RRP for the hardware on offer). UGREEN has clearly made efforts here to carve out their own style, adding their own aesthetic to the traditional 4-bay server box design that plagues NAS boxes at this scale. Equally, although they are not the first brand to consider Kickstarter/Crowdfunding for launching a new product in the NAS/personal-cloud sector, this is easily one of the most confident entries I have seen yet. The fact that this system arrives on the market primarily as a crowdfunded solution (though almost certainly, if successful, will roll out at traditional retail) is definitely going to give users some pause for thought. Equally, the UGREEN NAS software, still in beta at the time of writing, although very responsive and nailing down the basics, still feels like it needs more work to compete with the bigger boys at Synology and QNAP. Hardware architecture, scalability, and performance are all pretty impressive, though the performance of the Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe slots didn’t seem to hit the numbers I was expecting. Perhaps a question of PCIe bottlenecking internally, or a need for further tweaking and optimization as the system continues development. Bottom line, with expected software updates to roll out closer to launch and fulfillment, such as an expanded App center and mobile client, the UGREEN DXP4800 Plus is definitely a device worth keeping an eye on in the growing Turnkey and semi-DIY NAS market. As an alternative to public cloud services, this is a no-brainer and worth the entry price point. As an alternative to established Turnkey NAS Solutions, we will hold off judgment till it is publicly released.

SOFTWARE - 6/10
HARDWARE - 9/10
PERFORMANCE - 6/10
PRICE - 9/10
VALUE - 8/10


7.6
PROS
👍🏻Exceptional Hardware for the Price
👍🏻4 HDDs + 2x Gen 4x4 M.2 in 1 box under $400
👍🏻Good Balanced CPU choice in the Pentium Gold 8505
👍🏻10GbE and 2.5GbE as standard
👍🏻An SD Card Slot (wielrd rare!)
👍🏻10/10 Build Quality
👍🏻Great Scalability
👍🏻Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
👍🏻Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
👍🏻Established Brand entering the NAS Market
👍🏻Not too noisy (comparatively)
👍🏻Very Appealing retail package+accessories
CONS
👎🏻10GbE Performance was underwhelming
👎🏻Crowdfunding choice is confusing
👎🏻Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
👎🏻non-UGREEN PSU is unexpected
👎🏻

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Presentation

You really do have to hand it to UGREEN. The presentation of the DXP4800 Plus is genuinely top-tier. This brand’s experience in computer accessories has clearly influenced the presentation of their NAS system, opting for glossy retail packaging that boldly showcases the system’s capabilities over a standard dull brown box.

Inside the shiny box is a well-organized shipping container, with the system secured by rigid foam and an accessory kit containing everything needed to get started. As previously mentioned, retail packaging and device protection during transit are often overlooked by brands, risking damage. Despite being largely unpopulated, except for an internal 2242 SSD for the OS, minimizing the risk of damage, the extra effort on protection is appreciated.

The DXP4800 Plus includes nearly everything needed for setup, aside from hard drives. Given the early stage of the system’s crowdfunding campaign, additional storage options may later become available. The included kit, while basic, ensures users new to hosting their own servers have everything required.

It’s the attention to detail that impresses – from M.2 NVMe heat pads of notable quality and thickness for thermal dissipation, to the included Cat 7 network cables with high-quality gold/copper ends, differentiating them from standard cables.

Even the instruction manual, a rarity as most NAS brands now direct users online, stands out with its glossy presentation and offers more than basic setup guidance.

However, the choice of an external power supply (PSU) was unexpected, given UGREEN’s reputation for high-quality power adapters and cables. While not a deal-breaker, it’s curious to see a non-branded external PSU used, especially when the DXP480t model reviewed elsewhere came with a branded UGREEN PSU. This inconsistency in their approach to PSUs is puzzling.

Overall, the presentation of the DXP4800 Plus from UGREEN, a newcomer to the NAS market intending to launch via Kickstarter, is exceptionally well done. Despite some accessory quality inconsistencies, the overall package is commendable for a pre-release sample. Now, let’s proceed to discuss the system’s design.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Design

At first glance, the DXP 4800 Plus appears to be a fairly standard four-disk NAS enclosure, and you might be forgiven for thinking it’s just reiterating the typical case design prevalent among numerous companies. However, there’s more to its design and efficiency than meets the eye. For starters, the external enclosure is entirely metal, enhancing heat dissipation directly from the base panel housing the M.2 modules. Additionally, UGREEN has infused the design with their unique stylistic choices, evident in the presentation of individual bays and the arrangement and accessibility of various ports and connections.

The inclusion of small design flourishes, like the rear removable mesh metallic fan panel that magnetically attaches to the casing, is particularly appreciated. While such a feature is familiar to prosumer PC cases, it’s surprisingly rare in NAS designs – puzzling, given NAS systems’ continuous operation and higher likelihood of accumulating dust and debris. Despite being a relatively minor detail, this fan cover’s presence in UGREEN’s first product impresses me.

Handling individual storage bays, however, presents a mixed reaction. The bold numeric design distinguishes it aesthetically from other NAS brands that often opt for bland, nondescript bays. The tool-less, click-and-load trays that forego the need for a screwdriver for drive installation and the inclusion of individual locking mechanisms (with keys) are commendable features.

Yet, these trays feel somewhat flimsy compared to the more robust trays found in desktop solutions from Synology and QNAP. While they secure the hard drives and align with the internal enclosure runners, the internal locking mechanism doesn’t inspire confidence in its security. The trays’ perceived cheap production quality slightly detracts from the overall positive aesthetic. Despite this, the system supports the latest 22TB hard drives, which means daily interaction with these trays will be minimal.

The main storage area features a pre-constructed PCB with four integrated SATA and power connectors. The system documentation indicates that SAS drives are unsupported, a non-issue for this system’s scale and price point.

Upon removing the base’s metallic panel, the two M.2 NVMe SSD bays and upgradable DDR5 SODIMM ports are revealed. Space constraints make heat sink installation challenging, but UGREEN has anticipated this with the inclusion of thick heat pads in the accessory kit, facilitating heat dissipation through the external casing.

UGREEN’s entry into 24/7 service storage with the DXP 4800 Plus is noteworthy, especially for a brand new to this sector. Their effort to differentiate through design and functionality is largely successful, although the storage trays’ quality could be improved. Overall, the system’s design is a strong point, and I look forward to discussing ports and connectivity next.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Ports and Connections

One of the earliest things to notice about the connectivity on offer on the DXP 4800 Plus NAS is that this system brings back support for SD cards. This may seem almost insane to the average photo and video editor, but SD card readers on NAS devices have been largely absent for almost a decade, despite enormous protestations from photo and video editors for years. Therefore, it’s kind of impressive that UGREEN has opted to provide an SD card slot and a front-mounted USB Type-C connection on the DXP4800 Plus when practically every other brand in the NAS industry does not. It’s going to be a tremendously convenient feature for those wanting to ingest media directly into the system via numerous storage methods and camera systems, making it that much more convenient than many others in the market.

Carrying on the subject of convenience, it’s also worth highlighting that the system not only has a front-mounted USB like the majority of other NAS systems but also arrives with USB Type-C connectivity on the front. This is a surprisingly rare feature in most modern desktop NAS devices, even in 2024.

Flipping the device around, we see that the system has even more USB ports that can be utilized by the system in a host-client relationship. That means that the UGREEN NAS system will act as the host device for connected storage drives and supported peripherals. Unfortunately, this does mean that you cannot directly connect to this device using those USB ports, and the USB 2.0 connections are pretty much exclusively designed for connecting printers and office peripherals, uninterruptible power supplies, or keyboard/mouse in KVM setups alongside the visual output.

The visual output of this system is a 4K 60 frames per second HDMI 2.0 connection. The software for the UGREEN NAS system is still in beta, and currently, the HDMI output is limited to command line access. Currently, there is no graphical user interface afforded to the HDMI output, such as you would find on a QNAP or Asustor NAS system, but as this is a relatively niche feature for many, I’m not going to give them too much of a hard time over this.

Across the rest of the UGREEN NAS range, there is a multitude of different connection profiles and options. In the case of the DXP 4800 Plus, the system arrives with a single 10 gigabit ethernet connection and a single 2.5 gigabit Ethernet connection. Although there is a lack of Thunderbolt connectivity afforded to the more expensive Intel i5 options, the inclusion of these two copper network connections means that not only is there support for failover, but there is also support for link aggregation and port trunking. Given that the system already supports SMB Multi-channel, which can be enabled in the control panel of the UGREEN software, it means in Windows environments, there’s potential for 1.25 GB per second network transmission.The saturation of both of these ports is going to be pretty easy for a four-hard-drive and two NVMe system, and the system does support direct connection from a PC or Mac client directly into the UGREEN system if preferred. However, there is no option for upgrading the system via PCIe cards.

Overall, in terms of ports and connectivity, I’m really happy with everything I found on the DXP 4800 Plus, and although it lacks a bit of scalability in terms of improving upon the network connectivity down the line, what you have at this price point is a fantastic base level of network connectivity, combined with a decent degree of functionality and modern storage expandability to boot. However, all of that connectivity isn’t a great deal if you don’t have much to work with inside, so let’s talk about the internal hardware architecture of the UGREEN NAS.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Internal Hardware

As mentioned earlier, it’s surprisingly confident of UGREEN to launch so many different NAS devices simultaneously for their first foray into network-attached storage. Not only have they provided several different storage scales and architectures, but they are also supporting three different internal hardware CPUs in terms of CPU. The scale in terms of price and capabilities of each system varies, but they include the Intel N100, Intel Pentium Gold, and Intel 12th Generation i5. The DXP4800 Plus arrived with an Intel Pentium G processor that is a five-core, six-thread architecture (one power core, four efficiency cores).

Though not the first to utilize this CPU in domestic and prosumer NAS, nevertheless, this processor is remarkably underused. Generally, when most brands opt to play it safe with the N100/N300 or immediately scale up towards the i5. It’s surprising because the Pentium Gold processor does a surprisingly good job of balancing a reasonable price point versus a decent degree of hardware resources at your disposal. This is a 20 lane Gen 4 processor that still manages to be more power-efficient than the i5 in bigger models.

Arriving with integrated graphics, supporting up to 64 gigabytes of memory (arriving with 8GB of DDR5 SODIMM and two slots), there is a lot to like here. It is especially surprising when you realize that the brand already provides closely priced N100 and i5 models either side of this device in UGREEN’s NAS portfolio. This processor performs exceedingly well with Plex Media Server and, thanks to those 20 lanes, also means there’s a decent spread of available hardware architecture across the whole device.

The layout of the internal architecture is still yet to be confirmed at the time of writing this review, but digging a little into the backend via SSH revealed that each of the M.2 NVMe slots on the base of this system are Gen 4 x 4. However, how this all separates out on the system chipset and whether these are being delivered into PCIe switches to spread the architecture out for the rest of the system storage, double network connectivity, and dedicating lanes to all those available connections, is definitely an area that leaves pause for thought.

Returning to that base panel, we find that the system arrives with an 8GB DDR5 SODIMM memory module and the capacity to add an additional module when needed. 8GB for this system is pretty decent, but do keep in mind that this system does not support ECC memory. Indeed, none of the UGREEN systems support ECC memory, and although they make a point of highlighting the on-die checks associated with DDR5, most experienced storage enthusiasts tend to prefer traditional ECC memory support. Nevertheless, 8GB is a good amount of memory to start with, and it’s great to know that you are not locked in with presoldered and fixed memory on the board, which is a move often used by more economical brands to save some money and dedicate lanes more efficiently. There see to be two network controllers, one 10GbE controller located under a heatsink:

Which I had difficulty identifying, but I suspect is a Marvell AQtion Aquantia AQC113/AQC114/AQC114CS/AQC115Cs, comprising (from official pages) a high-performance,Scalable mGig, Ethernet MAC+PHY Controllers designed to support the following network rates: 10GBASE-T/5GBASET/ 2.5GBASE-T/1000BASET/100BASE-TX/10BASE-Te. When equipped with a PCI Express Gen 4 x4, this family of Scalable mGig Ethernet MAC+PHY Controllers easily handle the 10 GbE line-rate performance. The AQC113, AQC114, AQC114CS, AQC115C device family combines a mGig Ethernet MAC Controller with a full-reach, low-power, highperformance, multi-gigabit, single-port Gen 4 Ethernet Alaska PHY transceiver into a single, monolithic device that is designed using the latest 14nm, multi-gate, FinFET process technology.

And an additional 2.5GbE Controller (the Intel S2363L51 SRKTU, instead of the usual Intel i226-V 2.5GbE we have observed in a number of Topton/CWWK boards of late) that very little information is available for online:

The USB controller/manager appears to be an ASM1543, (from the ASmedia pages) a one Four to two differential channels mux switch with integrated Type-C Configuration Channel Logic Circuitry, using for USB3.1 type-C mux and CC detection application. The signal performance of mux switch is up to 10Gbps SuperSpeedPlus USB bus with low insertion loss and return loss, and it also supports USB plug orientation, configurable as DFP role or UFP role through the setting of strapping pins, and implementing the strapping for the setting/detection of Type-C current mode, following USB3.1 Revision 1.0 and USB Type-C Connector and Cable Revision 1.3 standard specification.

Next, we find a Richtek RT3624BE, (from the manf pages) a synchronous buck controller which supports 2 output rails and can fully meet Intel IMVP9.1 requirements. The RT3624BE adopts G-NAVPTM (Green Native AVP) which is Richtek’s proprietary topology derived from finite DC gain of EA amplifier with current mode control, making it easy to set the droop to meet all Intel CPU requirements of AVP (Adaptive Voltage Positioning). Based on the G-NAVPTM topology, the RT3624BE features a new generation of quick response mechanism (Adaptive Quick Response, AQR) to optimize AVP performance during load transient and reduce output capacitors. The RT3624BE integrates a high accuracy ADC for platform and function settings, such as ICCMAX, switching frequency, over-current threshold or AQR trigger level.=

In terms of the SATA storage management, I found a ASMedia ASM116 SATA host controller(AHCI). Which is upstream PCIe Gen3 x2 and downstream four SATA Gen3 ports. It’s a low latency, low cost and low power AHCI controller. With four SATA ports and cascaded port multipliers, ASM1164 can enable users to build up various high speed IO systems, including server, high capacity system storage or surveillance platforms.

Finally, we find the two M.2 NVMe slots. Each of these slots supports a 2280 length SSD, which, at launch, can be utilized as a storage pool. As the software, and indeed the system as a whole, is still in early development, features such as caching or even tiered caching appear to be absent at this time. Initially, I was really pleased and impressed that the DXP4800 Plus box arrived with twin NVMe four lanes architecture on each individual slot.

This means that this four-hard-drive system also comes with two super-fast 8000 megabytes per second bandwidth SSD upgrade slots – which is tremendously rare and hugely appealing.

Additionally, digging a bit more into the backend of the system via SSH showed that there had been no downgrade on this speed either! Typically, for reasons of lane allocation, consumption, or heat generation in a system, M.2 slots will often be internally downgraded to a lower performance speed (as is often the case with the likes of Synology and QNAP). There was no sign of this here, and this was a genuine breath of fresh air to see such a high speed and high bandwidth connection afforded to these SSD slots.

Earlier in March when I was testing the (late alpha, early Beta) version of the NAS software, system and services, the performance numbers I got were not hugely encouraging internally. However, there have been numerous improvements on the system software and I am pleased to confirm that the M.2 NVMe slots were indeed 4×4 bandwidth and that some brief 1GB transfer/creation testing showed some early 7GB/s benchmarks on the Gen 4×4 SSD I has inside the system. Now we cannot rule out the impact of caching internally and these tests are NOT reflective of everyday (i.e non synthetic) use, but it was definitely an encouraging sign.

However, when I tried to repeatedly move 1GB of data between each of the NM,2 NVMe, the performance would drop down to 2.4Gb/s, which further suggested some lane sharing and a possible bottleneck by a controller perhaps. Again, this is a beta software/system and UGREEN repeated that this system is still undergoing optimization.

External performance over 10GbE was also an area that I really, REALLY hope this is sees significant optimization. I was hitting a bottleneck of around 500-600MB/s on upload and download (on a 10Gbe / 1,000MB/s connection). The performance numbers below were over 10GbE (with the MTU set at 1500 – As the software is currently not allowing me to scale it to 9000 MTU/Jumbo frames) and for 4x HDDs in a RAID 5, I would be happy with 600MB/s realistically. however…

When I was hitting the SAME numbers when I was accessing a Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe over 10GbE, I would FULLY expect this to be 999MB/s up and down! Instead, the 10GbE connection, using AJA, on a Seagate Firecuda 530 SSD, was still hitting that bottleneck.

Switching to a Windows transfer test, moving 5GB of data to the m.2 NVMe SSD, over 10GbE saw similar results. My test PC in this case was running on a Gen4x4 SSD, so there was no meaningful storage bottleneck on my PC, and the connection was established via a clear 10GbE connection (via a managed Netgear switch) and using a Sonnet Solo 10G adapter over Thunderbolt.

Further testing confirmed performance dips when transferring data between SSDs, indicating a shared pathway. Despite this being a pre-release sample, and acknowledging potential future optimizations, the observed SSD performance, though still faster than many market alternatives, fell comparatively short of expectations given the hardware capabilities (though still higher than the majority of M.2 SSD performance offered by other brands providing HDD SATA + M.2 solutions right now).

The UGREEN NAS’s software, still in beta, promises further insights into the brand’s direction with their NAS solution and its accompanying software and services, warranting a closer examination as development progresses.

UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NASync Review – Software

At the time of writing, the UGREEN NAS software is still in beta, with the mobile application is live now. Reviewing the software included with the DXP4800 Plus—as a final product—feels somewhat premature. The NASsync software beta reveals many baseline functions and long-term plans, detailed in the video below in our initial overview and first impressions of the UGREEN NAS software:

You can read the MASSIVE Software review (covering the Desktop and Mobile experience) HERE on the NASCompares Review Article.

Alternatively, you can watch the video version of the UGREEN UGOS NAS Software Beta Review in the video below:

The TL;DR on the UGREEN NAS software (UPDATED)

it’s on track to become a smooth and user-friendly experience, comparable to giants like Synology and QNAP, especially in terms of the web browser experience. Unlike opting for the complexity of TrueNAS or the streamlined, container-focused UI of UnRAID, the UGREEN NAS software is more akin to Synology DSM. The foundation is clearly laid out for expansion in terms of features and tools for the user’s disposal. However, there are notable absences of baseline applications such as container or virtual machine support, and a multi-tiered backup solution within the web GUI (though the UGREEN NAS mobile and desktop clients are in development, expected to preview in March). Basic services for file management, shares, user account control, and an app center—soon to be linked to a repository—are all user-friendly but present some inconsistencies, likely due to its beta status and ongoing development. The physical product may be closer to final development, but the software needs more time for optimization. SMB services were less consistent than desired, and settings changes sometimes didn’t save or recall correctly. This is common for beta software finding its footing, yet it’s important to note that the hardware feels more refined than the software at this stage, months before user delivery. In brief:

What I liked:

  • Intuitive UI with services located logically and responsive controls.
  • The mobile application for iOS and Android is one of the best I have ever used in NAS!
  • Baseline services such as network interface management, user account control, firewall handling, and SSH interface control are all present.
  • A clearly defined app center awaiting connection to an online repository.
  • Helpful tips and guidance are available on most pages, aiding new users.
  • Support for modern services like SMB3 multi-channel and domain services in the beta.
  • Clear account and resource management accessible from the desktop, likely appealing to most users.
  • The inclusion of a remote access relay service and UGREEN account creation from day one, simplifying remote access for new users with built-in firewall and domain tools.
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – The HDMI output is now full controllable via the mobile application and is intiuative
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – A Docker application has now been added with access to numerous repository options!
  • UPDATE 5/4/24 – SSH is now disabled by default

What I disliked:

  • Absence of two-factor authentication in the software.
  • Lack of virtualization applications at this stage.
  • Sporadic SMB performance.
  • The Security Advisor tool is only suitable for Antivirus and Anti-Maleware protection, not to scan the system for security weaknesses and advisory actions
  • The HDMI output cannot be used by the desktop/browser user to the same extent as the mobile application + cannot be used by container tools (Plex, Home Automation, etc)
  • In-progress language integration, leading to occasional default displays in Chinese or error messages in Chinese despite English settings.

Improvements needed:

  • Expansion of app integration and desktop client tools for easier system-client bridging.
  • Introduction of a default application for device discovery on the local network, a basic service offered by many NAS brands.
  • More information on UGREEN account and remote access security.

Acknowledging this is a beta, it’s fair to reserve full judgment until the software fully rolls out. As it stands, this beta is promising yet lacks some established NAS software fundamentals. Hopefully, we’ll see significant advancements as the release approaches.

UGREEN DXP4800 Plus NAS Storage Review – Verdict and Conclusion

BOTTOM LINE – The UGREEN NASYnc DXP4800 Plus does not feel ‘finished’ yet and still needs more time in the over, but UGREEN have been very clear with me that this product is not intended for release and fulfilment till summer 2024 and improvements, optimization and product completion is still in progress. Evaluating the UGreen NAS systems, particularly the DXP4800 PLUS, presents a unique set of challenges, given its status as both a pre-release and a pre-crowdfunding sample. This NAS solution stands out not just for its robust construction but also for its exceptional entry price, which seems quite competitive even against its Retail Price Point for the array of hardware it brings to the table. UGreen’s initiative to infuse their extensive experience in computer accessories into a NAS product has resulted in a distinctive aesthetic that sets it apart from the conventional 4-bay server box designs that dominate the market. Their decision to launch through Kickstarter, while not entirely novel in the NAS or personal-cloud arena, signifies one of the most assertive and bold market entries observed to date. The strategy of arriving on the market primarily through crowdfunding will undoubtedly prompt potential users to carefully consider their investment. However, it’s worth noting the significant potential this approach offers for bringing innovative products directly to those who would most benefit from them. The current state of the UGreen NAS software, still in its beta phase, showcases a solid foundation with much promise, despite needing further refinement to stand toe-to-toe with industry giants like Synology and QNAP. The hardware’s scalability and overall performance metrics are commendable, though there’s an observed need for further optimization, particularly concerning the Gen 4×4 M.2 NVMe slots, which didn’t quite meet expected performance benchmarks. This could potentially be attributed to internal PCIe bottlenecking or other factors that may be addressed as the system progresses through its development phase. With the hope of significant software updates and enhancements, such as an expanded App center and a more integrated mobile client, the UGreen DXP4800 Plus is positioned as a noteworthy contender in the burgeoning turnkey and semi-DIY NAS market. Its compelling value proposition as an alternative to mainstream public cloud services, coupled with its attractive pricing, renders it a formidable option for those seeking robust data storage solutions. Yet, in consideration of its potential as an alternative to more established turnkey NAS solutions, a final verdict is reserved until the product’s full public release. The expectation is that, with continued development and user feedback, the UGreen DXP4800 Plus will not only refine its offerings but also significantly influence user expectations and standards within the NAS market.

PROS of the UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NAS CONS of the UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NAS
Exceptional Hardware for the Price
4 HDDs + 2x Gen 4×4 M.2 in 1 box under $400
Good Balanced CPU choice in the Pentium Gold 8505
10GbE and 2.5GbE as standard
An SD Card Slot (wielrd rare!)
10/10 Build Quality
Great Scalability
Fantastic Mobile Application (even vs Synology and QNAP etc)
Desktop/Browser GUI shows promise
Established Brand entering the NAS Market
Not too noisy (comparatively)
Very Appealing retail package+accessories
10GbE Performance was underwhelming
Crowdfunding choice is confusing
Software (still in Beta) is still far from ready 22/3/24
non-UGREEN PSU is unexpected

Click the Link Below to find out more about the UGREEN NASync NAS Series on the brand’s official Site:

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology CC400W Camera Review

Par : Rob Andrews
20 mars 2024 à 15:00

Synology CC400W Camera Review

Remember when Synology was only famous for its NAS? Yeah, me neither. Among all the server brands discussed here at NAS Compares, few have created such a diverse portfolio of home and business solutions, covering a wide array of peripherals and accessories, as Synology has. Although their CCTV and security application, Surveillance Station, has been available on their NAS devices for decades, it’s only in the past few years that we’ve seen the brand introduce their own range of surveillance cameras. The new CC400W is the latest addition to their lineup and, although it might look arguably less enterprise-grade compared to the BC500 and TC500 POE high-protection models, the CC400W doesn’t seem to be a slouch either! Targeting indoor use, this multi-surface deployable camera comes with impressively sleek integration with Synology Surveillance Station, no need for a camera license, industry-approved encryption, and wireless connectivity. Indeed, this was the kind of camera I hoped Synology would release in the first phase of their product series launch. Still, better late than never! Today, we’re going to review the new CC400W surveillance camera from Synology NAS and help you decide whether you can trust it with the security of your data and assets!

NoteVideo Review Available NOW on YouTube HERE

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Quick Conclusion

The Synology CC400W, when viewed in isolation, stands out as a slightly above-average surveillance camera. It may not be at the cutting edge of technology, but it doesn’t aspire to be. Instead, Synology is focusing on expanding its camera lineup to complement its well-established surveillance NAS platform, aiming to offer robust and seamlessly integrated products rather than chasing the latest trends. The commitment to ensuring compatibility with third-party cameras while expanding its own range, including the CC400W, BC500, and TC500, is a smart move. It appeals to users seeking a unified first-party surveillance solution that minimizes compatibility issues and security vulnerabilities. One of the CC400W’s strengths is its honesty about capabilities, a refreshing approach in a market often dominated by overhyped claims. This camera clearly delineates its role in the surveillance setup, highlighting a balanced workload between the camera and the Synology NAS. This straightforward integration is likely to attract users looking for a hassle-free surveillance solution. The camera’s enhanced security features, compliance with US certifications, and the absence of a requirement for a surveillance camera license further contribute to its appeal as a reliable, if not revolutionary, product designed for long-term use.

However, there are aspects of the CC400W that could be improved. Given its exclusive design for use with Synology systems and services, the absence of an included SD card at its price point is a notable oversight. Additionally, a two-year warranty feels somewhat limited, especially considering the camera’s likely deployment in business settings for five to ten years, exclusively within Synology’s ecosystem. Moreover, there seems to be a gap in understanding among users regarding the camera’s object detection capabilities versus object recognition and analysis—a distinction Synology could clarify more effectively. Despite these drawbacks, for those looking to expand their Synology surveillance setup without the complexities of camera licenses, desiring quick setup and integration under a single brand, the CC400W confidently meets these needs.

SOFTWARE - 10/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 8/10
PRICE - 8/10
VALUE - 8/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻Fast setup and near seamless integration with Synology NAS hardware
👍🏻The audio in and out is as clear as a whistle No need for a camera license simplifies everything!
👍🏻Sturdy and novel mounting base
👍🏻The wireless connectivity was one of the smoothest setups I have experienced in a surveillance camera
👍🏻Dedicated disconnection alerts in conjunction with SD card Edge recording works seamlessly!
👍🏻Remarkably well built, compact yet sturdy.
👍🏻The AI assisted object recognition (human and vehicle) although not perfect is still well presented and accessible in Surveillance Station
👍🏻Camera firmware updates are managed by the NAS smoothly.
👍🏻Significant certification and encryption standards mean unfettered deployment in US businesses
CONS
👎🏻Surprisingly expensive given the hardware
👎🏻Lack of an SD card, despite it being a Synology branded product with Synology services that take advantage of the SD card, at this price!
👎🏻The two-year warranty seems weirdly short given the context of its deployment. Synology could do better in presenting the difference between their AI object cameras and deep video analysis NVRs, to avoid potential user confusion or disappointment.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?



Synology CC400W Camera Review – Presentation

Much like the other cameras in Synology’s lineup, the Synology CC400W arrives in a pleasingly aesthetic external package. Considering that 90% of other surveillance cameras on the market, whether for NVR or DVR systems, tend to arrive in plain, brown packaging with little fanfare, Synology deserves a nod here for their continued effort in the presentation of their solutions. The box sides, adorned with specific information relating to the camera’s specifications and capabilities, represent a step above the usual plain, brown, branded box design afforded to other cameras in the market.

Upon opening the retail package, the camera and accessories are all neatly laid out in individual quadrants. As this is a wireless camera, the range of accessories was always expected to be somewhat limited. Nevertheless, everything is presented very well, and each component bears the Synology branding. It also appears that the majority of the packaging materials are fully recyclable.

Alongside the CC400W itself, the camera comes with a remarkably compact PSU. Designed for exceptionally low power consumption, the diminutive five-watt power adapter reflects this. Furthermore, this adapter connects via a USB Type-C interface, meaning you’re not solely reliant on Synology’s own PSU.

The option to purchase much longer USB Type-C extension cables facilitates greater deployment distance from a power outlet. Additionally, with the right arrangement of five-watt external batteries and solar panels, the feasibility of deploying this camera via solar power is clear, as long as a USB-connected battery point is included in the setup.

While Synology doesn’t directly support this, and the CC400W doesn’t come with its own power bank for USB solar panel support, this does highlight the camera’s low power requirement.

The rest of the accessories are quite standard, including warranty information, first-time setup guidance, details on using the wall bracket and fixings, and instructions for attaching the camera. That’s about it, which is perfectly adequate for this kind of camera.

Anything more could have been unnecessary and potentially wasteful. However, I am a bit disappointed that Synology does not include an SD card of any capacity with these cameras at this price point, given the affordability of SD cards and their utility in Surveillance Station.

Additionally, it seems slightly unfair of Synology to only provide this camera with a 2-year manufacturer’s warranty when their other cameras come with a 3-year warranty. There’s an argument that those cameras were designed for higher outdoor durability and, with POE support in previous releases, they have fewer potential failure points. However, even though the CC400W isn’t exactly a budget camera, for its price point and intended use, it’s surprising that Synology didn’t offer a three-year warranty as they did with other camera releases. Nonetheless, the Surveillance Station software receives effective lifetime support on Synology NAS systems, so there’s no limitation in terms of security updates and feature enhancements.

Overall, the CC400W presents itself as a quite pleasing and well-packaged kit, a cut above many other supported ONVIF cameras used with Surveillance Station, yet not exactly a game-changer. My concerns regarding the lack of an included SD card and the 2-year warranty aside (considering that the majority of budget cameras barely come with a one-year warranty), I’m satisfied with what I find here. Now, let’s focus on the design of the new CC400W camera.

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Design

The Synology CC400W Camera is equipped with a 2.12 mm lens, designed to capture a broad field of view with its 125° horizontal, 72° vertical, and 145° diagonal viewing angles. This wide-angle lens ensures comprehensive coverage of the monitored area, making it ideal for various indoor settings where maximizing the field of view is essential for effective surveillance. The lens’s design aims to provide clear and detailed images across a wide area, enhancing the camera’s utility in security applications.

With an aperture of F2.0, the lens of the Synology CC400W allows for considerable light intake, contributing to the camera’s ability to produce crisp images even in lower light conditions. This feature is particularly beneficial for surveillance in environments with varying lighting, ensuring consistent video quality throughout the day and into the night. The effective aperture supports the camera’s high-resolution HDR video capability, enabling it to capture high-quality footage with balanced exposure in scenes with contrasting light and shadow.

The camera’s lens supports night vision capabilities, utilizing high power infrared LED to illuminate up to 10 meters away. This ensures that the Synology CC400W can provide clear video surveillance in complete darkness, extending its monitoring capabilities to 24/7 operation. The lens, in conjunction with the camera’s infrared capabilities, plays a crucial role in achieving effective night vision, making the CC400W a reliable choice for continuous surveillance needs, regardless of the time of day.

The Synology CC400W Camera not only records live audio as part of its surveillance footage but also allows for the output of custom alarms or direct voice communications through Synology Surveillance Station client services as needed. This functionality is enhanced by an audio sensor that can notify the surveillance setup of noise levels, which can be set permanently or according to a schedule, to preemptively warn of potential intruders. These audio detection alerts, along with physical tampering alerts, add valuable features to the camera’s capabilities, requiring a modern camera for smooth operation. Synology has commendably integrated these services into the camera, reducing reliance on the Synology NAS system to handle all the work.

Underneath a rubber panel at the base of the camera lies a reset button and, more importantly, an SD card slot. While SD card slots are not a novel feature in network cameras, their utility with third-party cameras in Synology’s Surveillance Station is notably limited. However, the SD card slot in the Synology CC400W can be fully utilized for edge recording. This means that in the event of a disconnection from the Synology NAS—due to network failure or system compromise—the camera will continue recording and managing alerts locally on the SD card. Once the connection is restored, it will sync the recordings and alerts back to the NAS. This feature, combined with the Synology C2 cloud recording service, ensures comprehensive protection across various failure scenarios and security threats.

The camera’s base hinge features a 360-degree rotating metal arm, allowing for adjustment across three axes. The base itself is magnetic, simplifying the installation process and significantly easing deployment. Despite its ease of installation and low power consumption, it’s essential to remember this camera still requires a power source, necessitating a USB Type-C outlet or the use of the included five-watt USB PSU. The magnetic base is a notably convenient feature, uncommon in surveillance cameras, and the locking mechanism for the aperture/hinges ensures once positioned, the camera remains securely in place.

The Synology CC400W Camera features an IP65 rating, indicating a high level of protection against dust ingress and water jets, although slightly lower than the BC500 and TC500 models. This rating suggests the camera is not designed for exposure to heavy rain or outdoor elements, emphasizing its suitability for indoor or sheltered outdoor use.

In the realm of government surveillance system installations within the United States, professionals are required to navigate with precision to adhere to specific legal requirements, notably under section 889 of the 2019 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA). This legislation outlines stringent criteria for video surveillance equipment intended for use on U.S. government properties, prohibiting equipment and services from certain companies deemed a national security risk, including Huawei Technologies Company, ZTE Corporation, Hytera Communications Corporation, Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Company, and Dahua Technology Company. This mandate ensures that only compliant products, which do not incorporate components from these restricted entities, are utilized in sensitive government-related surveillance operations. For security professionals and installers, understanding and adhering to these regulations is crucial when selecting equipment for government projects to ensure legal compliance and maintain national security integrity.

Furthermore, the Trade Agreements Act (TAA) complements the NDAA by enforcing standards for products used in government contracts, requiring them to be produced in the United States or other approved countries. The compliance of security products with both NDAA and TAA is a critical factor for businesses and contractors engaged in federal government projects, signifying that the equipment does not contain components from restricted companies and adheres to trade regulations. The Synology CC400W, with its NDAA and TAA certification, stands as a prime example of a compliant surveillance camera suitable for use in government-related installations. This certification not only ensures adherence to U.S. laws but also positions the CC400W as a viable option for security professionals seeking to fulfill government contracts with confidence in the legality and security of their surveillance technology choices. So, unsurprisingly, the camera’s benefits of NDAA and TAA certification, make it a compliant choice for businesses, especially those dealing with U.S. government contracts. These certifications are crucial in the wake of security concerns and trade disputes, as they ensure the camera meets strict standards required for use in sensitive environments. The CC400W strikes a balance by offering compatibility with Synology’s platform, compliance with important regulatory standards, and moderate affordability for business users.

The design and production quality of the Synology CC400W Camera are commendable. While it’s still a surveillance camera and praise must be relative, it stands out as a compact and easily deployable option for business use. Some might note the absence of an included SD card or a solar panel with an internal battery system as drawbacks, but given its intended use case, these are minor concerns. The focus now shifts to how this camera integrates into your surveillance setup.

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Network Connectivity

The Synology CC400W is tailored specifically for integration with Synology NAS systems, eschewing support for use with third-party NVRs or NAS devices. It boasts wireless network connectivity, supporting dual-band Wi-Fi frequencies of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz, providing a reliable and sufficient range for camera deployment and the maintenance of stable video streams. While recent trends have introduced Wi-Fi 6 surveillance cameras featuring the 6 GHz band, such enhancements are deemed somewhat superfluous in the surveillance domain, where ensuring ample coverage distance remains the primary objective.

Lacking a physical Ethernet connection, the CC400W might deter users seeking a hybrid deployment approach. However, its integration with Synology software streamlines the setup process. Notably, the camera does not require a Synology surveillance camera license for operation in Surveillance Station, allowing users to conserve the two licenses typically included with most Synology NAS systems. This camera’s compatibility facilitates seamless firmware updates and direct control via the Surveillance Station GUI, simplifying long-term management and maintenance compared to third-party camera solutions.

Deployment of the CC400W requires it to reside within the same local area network as the Synology NAS it is configured to record to. This setup may necessitate adjustments to existing VLAN configurations, especially in environments with scattered wireless access points. The absence of a wired connection option could pose challenges for some setups. Configuration is streamlined through the DS cam mobile app for Android and iOS, which automatically detects the camera within the local network, eliminating the need for manual setup. This ease of integration underscores the camera’s designed compatibility with Synology’s ecosystem, offering a hassle-free addition to existing surveillance systems.

During practical evaluation, the CC400W’s performance was tested using a $10, 10-meter USB-C extension cable to extend power delivery distance, demonstrating the camera’s low power requirements and flexible deployment potential. The camera maintained high-quality video transmission even when placed 8 meters away from the nearest wireless access point, ensuring desired bitrate and framerate consistency. The ability to integrate and manage live feeds, archival footage, and AI-driven alerts within Surveillance Station’s monitoring center highlights the CC400W’s seamless operation and contribution to comprehensive surveillance setups, emphasizing its role within Synology’s networked ecosystem.

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Surveillance Station Software Support

Reviewing the Synology CC400W camera without addressing the Synology Surveillance Station software would be incomplete. This camera essentially relies on a Synology NAS and its integrated surveillance software to function. It’s no exaggeration to say that for many, the Surveillance Station software—bundled with every Synology NAS, regardless of size—justifies the entire cost of the system. Offering an enterprise-grade surveillance platform that is both user-friendly and rich in features, Surveillance Station has evolved from a niche add-on to one of Synology’s primary selling points. The software’s accessibility, client support, security, and comprehensive feature set make it a standout, regardless of whether it’s paired with a Synology CC400W camera or a third-party option. To delve into a detailed review of Surveillance Station would significantly extend the length of this article. Fortunately, a comprehensive review of Synology Surveillance Station 9.1 has been previously conducted, available below, a full review on YouTube. This review covers the wide array of features and benefits offered by this surveillance software when used in conjunction with a Synology camera. The Synology CC400W camera is specifically engineered to provide optimal performance with Synology Surveillance Station, the current version being 9.1.1. The camera’s integration with Surveillance Station offers advanced functionality that outshines the features provided by third-party and non-edge-AI-recognition cameras.

The CC400W camera, when paired with Surveillance Station, supports a plethora of services that transform your security experience. It provides access to live camera feed (monitoring center), which can be scaled to accommodate several cameras on screen simultaneously. You can also view live feeds and previous recordings side-by-side on the software.

Additionally, the Surveillance Station allows for privacy mask and watermark applications on the feed.

It also supports the upload of eMaps and integrates with third-party mapping services like Google Maps and OpenMaps.

Surveillance Station isn’t limited to camera support. It also provides control for IP speakers, door controls, and I/O supported peripherals. Users can access the system swiftly and intuitively via a mobile app, and even use their mobile as another surveillance camera feed with Synology Live Cam. Alerts and push notifications can be scheduled for specific events, and the system generates downloadable analytical reports.

The Surveillance Station further extends its functionality with an array of additional add-ons. These range from YouTube Live Streaming and video integrity tools to transaction checking and IFTTT/Webhook services.

It also offers features like motion detection, missing object detection, idle zone monitoring, and foreign object area tagging. Access to the Surveillance Station is conveniently provided through web browsers, desktop clients, and mobile clients, either over the local network or remotely.

One of the key features is the Smart Lapse creation, which lets you truncate long periods of recording into speedy sequences. For example, you can turn a full day’s footage into a few minutes for quick scanning. It also supports cloud recording with Synology C2 Surveillance (available with a free trial, then on a subscription basis).

The Surveillance Station also offers a Home Mode, which allows automated camera schedules to kick in when a defined user exits or enters the premises using WiFi links. More details on these features can be found in our review of Synology Surveillance Station 9.1 on our YouTube channel:

The CC400W camera, paired with Surveillance Station, supports sophisticated AI detection techniques like people detection, vehicle detection, intrusion detection, crowd detection, and loitering detection. It also offers a Smart Search feature that lets you search a predefined area of a recorded feed for specific incidents.

Vehicle Detection – Similar to its capability for human detection, the CC400W camera extends its intelligent recognition to vehicles as well. This feature proves particularly useful in situations when the premises are closed, and an unexpected vehicle enters the vicinity. The surveillance system can be programmed to provide ‘out of hours’ alerts, notifying owners whenever vehicles approach their premises during closed or off hours. It’s an excellent way to ensure the security of your property when you’re not physically present.

Intrusion Detection – The CC400W camera takes intrusion detection a notch higher with its advanced features. Users can draw lines on the feed that can have multiple bend or break points, marking out specific areas as off-limits. This allows the system to monitor if people or vehicles cross into these forbidden zones. Thanks to edge AI recognition, you can customize this feature to fit your needs—for example, allowing an area to be entered by people but not vehicles or vice versa. This level of customization helps create ‘no go’ zones at specific times, further enhancing the security of your premises.

Crowd Detection – The CC400W camera’s recognition capabilities extend beyond just humans and vehicles. It also offers nuanced crowd detection. For instance, the system could be programmed to ignore one or two people in a predefined area. However, if that number increases to five or six, it could trigger an alert. This crowd detection feature enables you to set thresholds for alerts based on the number of people in a particular area, ensuring you’re notified only when necessary.

Loitering Detection – Similar to crowd detection, loitering detection is another impressive feature of the CC400W camera. This function enables the camera to alert you when an individual or vehicle remains within a predefined area for an unusually long period. People just passing by won’t trigger an alert, but if they loiter around for a while, the system will notify you. This helps you keep an eye on any potential suspicious activity around your premises.

Smart Search – This feature significantly enhances the surveillance process by allowing you to focus on a specific area within recorded feeds. For instance, you can set the system to alert you of any movement, person, or vehicle in a predetermined spot, such as a door, desk, or window. By combining Smart Search with Smart Time Lapse, you can sift through weeks of recordings in a fraction of the time, automatically identifying any noteworthy events in a particular spot. It allows you to retroactively apply advanced surveillance parameters, even if they weren’t set up at the time of recording.

While the CC400W camera is impressive, it’s important to note that it does not support database storage. It cannot store a reference of specific people or faces and vehicle registrations for future comparison when they appear in the feed, allowing alerts to be scaled accordingly. To access this kind of functionality, a DVA system such as the Synology DVA1622 2-Bay or DVA3221 4 Bay is necessary. Similarly, the CC400W camera cannot keep numerical track of the number of people or objects crossing the set intrusion lines, making it impossible to maintain an accurate count—for instance, knowing who is in or out during a fire alarm. Thus, while the CC400W camera provides a range of advanced features, it has its limitations.

Recordings are sent via HTTPS/SRTP encryption to the NAS, are encrypted when recorded to the local memory card, and remain encrypted when backed up on the Surveillance C2 cloud service. Furthermore, the previously mentioned Synology CC400W camera is NDAA and TAA compliant, which gives it a distinct edge over lower-priced Chinese cameras. In conclusion, while the CC400W Camera does not match up to more expensive Deep Video Analysis systems like the DVA162/DVA3221, its exclusive features and exemption from surveillance licenses make it a compelling choice.

Surveillance Station boasts a vast array of features and services, many of which are either managed by the system itself or utilized in collaboration with the security camera. The integration of AI services with the CC400W camera opens up additional possibilities, although these are somewhat limited when compared to the capabilities unlocked with Synology’s DVA (Deep Video Analysis) NAS units. The CC400W can recognize humans and vehicles, create paths and exclusion zones, and assist in AI-driven searches to accelerate archive retrievals. However, lacking an onboard AI database means it cannot perform more complex AI tasks that require immediate access to an extensive, regularly updated system database—such as people counting, license plate recognition, and facial recognition. These advanced functionalities necessitate a DVA NAS and are crucial to consider when setting up a surveillance system aimed at recognition or identification, as these tasks require different system resources and camera capabilities.

What IS and ISN’T Possible with the Synology Camera AI-Assisted Services?

Now, despite the Synology CC400W, BC500 and TC500 Surveillance Cameras arriving with onboard hardware for AI-powered recognition tasks, it is worth highlighting that using them is NOT the same as using the Deep Video Analysis (DVA) series of NAS servers in Synology’s portfolio. These operations are managed from inside the camera and the alerts are handled and actioned by the NAS after the camera sends the appropriate alert – and these cameras so NOT have the same level of hardware as the DVA1622 and DVA3221 inside each of them! Additionally, whereas the DVA series manages multiple tasks internally from multiple cameras, only using the camera hardware as a life ‘feed’, these cameras cannot run deeper AI tasks that involve counting, internal database management and keeping records of AI referral data internally – they do not have the storage or processing power for that. So more complex people counting and specific facial recognition will not be immediately available to your PLUS series Diskstation, just because you are using the BC500, CC400W and/or TC500. Here is a breakdown of the services available to users with either Synology Cameras or a Synology DVA NAS:

AI Service Case Use BC500 & TC500 DVA1622 & DVA3221
People / Vehicle/Loitering Detection Reduce false alarm and protect against loitering YES YES
Crowd Detection Monitor public safety or quality of service YES YES
Intrusion Detection Protect perimeter and restricted area YES YES
Instant Search Investigate incidents quickly after they happen YES NO
People/Vehicle Counting Calculate occupancy in shops, food courts, or parking lots with aggregated counting of people and vehicles entering and leaving NO YES
Face Recognition Automate personnel identification and prevent unauthorized access NO YES
License Plate Recognition Identify license plates and set up triggers based on configurable allow or block lists NO YES

If you are unaware of the Synology Deep Video Analysis NAS system, you can find out more about it in the video reviews of the hardware and software below from our YouTube channel:

Synology CC400W Camera Review – Conclusion

The Synology CC400W, when viewed in isolation, stands out as a slightly above-average surveillance camera. It may not be at the cutting edge of technology, but it doesn’t aspire to be. Instead, Synology is focusing on expanding its camera lineup to complement its well-established surveillance NAS platform, aiming to offer robust and seamlessly integrated products rather than chasing the latest trends. The commitment to ensuring compatibility with third-party cameras while expanding its own range, including the CC400W, BC500, and TC500, is a smart move. It appeals to users seeking a unified first-party surveillance solution that minimizes compatibility issues and security vulnerabilities.

One of the CC400W’s strengths is its honesty about capabilities, a refreshing approach in a market often dominated by overhyped claims. This camera clearly delineates its role in the surveillance setup, highlighting a balanced workload between the camera and the Synology NAS. This straightforward integration is likely to attract users looking for a hassle-free surveillance solution. The camera’s enhanced security features, compliance with US certifications, and the absence of a requirement for a surveillance camera license further contribute to its appeal as a reliable, if not revolutionary, product designed for long-term use.

However, there are aspects of the CC400W that could be improved. Given its exclusive design for use with Synology systems and services, the absence of an included SD card at its price point is a notable oversight. Additionally, a two-year warranty feels somewhat limited, especially considering the camera’s likely deployment in business settings for five to ten years, exclusively within Synology’s ecosystem. Moreover, there seems to be a gap in understanding among users regarding the camera’s object detection capabilities versus object recognition and analysis—a distinction Synology could clarify more effectively. Despite these drawbacks, for those looking to expand their Synology surveillance setup without the complexities of camera licenses, desiring quick setup and integration under a single brand, the CC400W confidently meets these needs.

Synology CC400W PROS Synology CC400W CONS
  • Fast setup and near seamless integration with Synology NAS hardware
  • The audio in and out is as clear as a whistle No need for a camera license simplifies everything!
  • Sturdy and novel mounting base
  • The wireless connectivity was one of the smoothest setups I have experienced in a surveillance camera
  • Dedicated disconnection alerts in conjunction with SD card Edge recording works seamlessly!
  • Remarkably well built, compact yet sturdy.
  • The AI assisted object recognition (human and vehicle) although not perfect is still well presented and accessible in Surveillance Station
  • Camera firmware updates are managed by the NAS smoothly.
  • Significant certification and encryption standards mean unfettered deployment in US businesses
  • Surprisingly expensive given the hardware
  • Lack of an SD card, despite it being a Synology branded product with Synology services that take advantage of the SD card, at this price!
  • The two-year warranty seems weirdly short given the context of its deployment. Synology could do better in presenting the difference between their AI object cameras and deep video analysis NVRs, to avoid potential user confusion or disappointment.

 

If you are thinking of buying a Synology NAS, please use the links below as it results in us at NASCompares receiving an affiliate fee from Amazon:

Need More Help Choosing the Right NAS?

Choosing the right data storage solution for your needs can be very intimidating and it’s never too late to ask for help. With options ranging from NAS to DAS, Thunderbolt to SAS and connecting everything up so you can access all your lovely data at the touch of a button can be a lot simpler than you think. If you want some tips, guidance or help with everything from compatibility to suitability of a solution for you, why not drop me a message below and I will get back to you as soon as possible with what you should go for, its suitability and the best place to get it. This service is designed without profit in mind and in order to help you with your data storage needs, so I will try to answer your questions as soon as possible.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

 

A Guide to Buying the RIGHT Hard Drives for Your NAS – 2024 Edition

Par : Rob Andrews
18 mars 2024 à 18:00

Choosing the Best Hard Drives for your NAS

If you’re considering a NAS server for your home or business, selecting the appropriate hard drive is crucial. Just as each utensil in a cutlery set serves a unique purpose, NAS drives are designed for specific scenarios. Using unsuitable drive media in your NAS can significantly affect its performance and efficiency. In the past years, hard drive manufacturers have developed server-tailored hard drives (including SSDs) that cater to the unique demands of NAS systems. These drives are designed for sporadic access patterns, continuous operation (24×7), quick read/write cycles, and enhanced durability required in NAS environments.

As of late 2023, the market has seen an evolution in storage capacity, with commercial hard drives reaching up to 22TB and data centers testing drives between 24-30TB. This increase in capacity reflects the growing data storage demands in both personal and professional settings. However, the abundance of options, with more than fifteen top-tier NAS and Data Center class drives available, can make the selection process overwhelming. In this guide, I aim to simplify this process. Below, you’ll find a breakdown of eight different NAS/Server architectures along with the most suitable hard drive options for each, updated to reflect the latest advancements in technology and market trends as of 2023/2024.

Note – Use our Best Price Per TB Calculator tool HERE in order to get the best value storage for your needs. It includes filters for NAS size, redundancy, budget and capacity needs too!

Recommended NAS Hard Drives

Key Considerations in Buying Hard Drives for Your NAS

Before selecting the right NAS hard drive, it’s essential to grasp some key terms in the data storage industry. This knowledge ensures that the drive you choose meets your requirements to the highest standard. Here are some crucial terms you need to know, updated for 2023/2024, to decode the marketing jargon and understand the strengths and weaknesses of each drive:

RAID – Standing for Redundant Array of Independent Disks, RAID is a method of using multiple NAS HDDs simultaneously to enhance capacity, speed, and, most importantly, data safety. Unlike backups, RAID 0 combines total storage for high performance but lacks a safety net if a drive fails. RAID 1 cuts your total storage in half but provides a one-drive safety net. RAID 5 and RAID 6 offer one or two disk safety nets, respectively, and support much larger storage arrays. Other RAID levels exist, but these are the most widely used.

SATA – Despite it’s age, SATA still remains the most popular connection of HDDs in 2023/2024 (despite the rise of M.2 NVMe SSD use in NAS). SATA allows up to 6 Gigabits per second throughput. However, mechanical HDDs rarely exceeded 280MB/s. By 2023/2024, while SATA remains prevalent, advancements in connections like SAS, NVMe, and U.2, particularly in SSDs, have become more significant in enterprise settings.

Saturation – This term refers to the amount of data flowing through an interface/bandwidth. For instance, a SATA HDD might allow up to 600MB/s, but most NAS HDDs achieve around 180-280MB/s due to their mechanical design. Therefore, the saturation for a single drive is lower, at 180/280MB/s.

Platters – These are the disks inside the HDD that store data. Higher capacity drives feature more platters. Although compression techniques can increase space, there’s a limit to their effectiveness.

Rotation Speed – This indicates how fast the platters spin, enabling the arm/actuator to locate and write data magnetically.

Cache – This memory area on the NAS hard drive compiles and distributes data being processed by the disk. Larger capacity NAS hard drives typically have a larger cache, as do drives using Shingled Magnetic Recording (SMR), which requires more handling space due to its unique writing style.

Terabytes Written (TBW), AKA ‘Workload Rating’– A metric often given annually, TBW indicates the amount of data a NAS Hard Drive can handle in a year while maintaining performance. This figure considers the potential for repeatedly filling and emptying the drive, common in data centers or tiered backups. Standard NAS hard drives usually have a TBW of around 180TBW, Pro series around 300TBW, and Enterprise-class HDDs 550TBW or more. This is often referred to as the workload rating.

Magnetic Recording – This refers to how data is stored on the platters. As of 2023/2024, there are several prevalent types: SMR (Shingled Magnetic Recording), PMR/CMR (Perpendicular/Conventional Magnetic Recording), EAMR (Energy Assisted Magnetic Recording), and HAMR (Heat Assisted Magnetic Recording). Each type has its pros and cons, but PMR/CMR remains the most popular for NAS hard drives.

Warranty Length – This is the period during which the manufacturer will repair or replace a NAS hard drive if it fails due to manufacturing issues. Warranties typically range from 3 to 5 years.

These terms are essential for choosing the best NAS hard drive for your system in the context of 2023/2024. Next, we’ll examine different NAS hardware environments and recommend the best NAS hard drive for each.

Best Hard Drives for an Affordable RAID 6 Desktop 6/8-Bay NAS – Seagate Ironwolf (non-Pro)

1-12TB, 5900-7200RPM, 64-256MB Cache, 180TBW, 3yr Warranty, Rescue Data Recovery Services Included $50-229 

For those who are looking at a NAS server for business, or are home users who have made the enterprising move into the Prosumer bracket, then a 6-Bay or 8-Bay desktop NAS solution will become incredibly attractive. At this storage tier, we find a number of very cool and incredibly useful features become more widely available. For a start, we find the utility of RAID 6 (the 2 disk safety net configuration) much more palatable, as it makes less of a dent on our total available storage. Additionally, at this storage size, we start to see much more powerful processors, such as the Intel Core (i3, i5, etc) series arrive, AMD Ryzen and even Xeons. This combined with huge expandability of both memory internally and storage externally and generally with 10Gbe included as standard or available as an upgrade. So, at this scale of NAS storage, the hard drive choice becomes more important, as you do not want to create an internal bottleneck. For this tier of storage, I recommend the Seagate Ironwolf range of NAS drives. They arrive with a large number of 7200RM drives (with 5400RPM in the smaller capacities), a 180 terabytes per year guaranteed workload and the Seagate Rescue service. For those that are not aware, the Seagate Rescue+ package is a data recovery service that is included with your Ironwolf and Ironwolf Pro drives that, alongside your 3 year warranty, includes an additional 3 years of data recovery services.

What that means is that if your drive fails through no fault of your own within reason (so, no, not smashing it with a hammer), you can send the drive off to the Seagate recovery labs and they will try to get that data back. From accidental deletion, all the way through to mechanical and forensic level recovery, this is an impressive inclusion! You should still factor other safety nets in your architecture (backups, UPS, RAID, etc) but given the cost of data recovery services (costing anything from hundreds to thousands of pounds), this is a very, VERY useful inclusion when you need it. Additionally, Seagate Ironwolf hard drives sill manage to be the most affordable NAS drives on the market compared with their competitors, even when including the Rescue recovery included. They are also the only 3rd party NAS hard drive brand that has a tool to monitor drive health available on practically ALL the NAS software GUIs in the market, in Seagate Ironwolf Health Management.

+ Excellent Price Point

+ Rescue Data Recovery Services

+ Seagate Ironwolf Health Management

+ ONLY CMR/PMR Drives in their NAS Range

– Max Drive Capacity is 12TB (Pro Series go up to 22TB)

– Noisier General Operation than WD Red Drives

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

Seagate IronWolf, 8TB ST8000VN002 £185 Amazon usa USA £185 [LINK]
Seagate IronWolf 8TB NAS Internal Hard Drive HDD Amazon usa USA $139.99 [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

Best Hard Drives for a Small NAS Drive – WD Red & WD Red Plus

1-14TB, 5400/7200RPM (higher Caps = 7200RPM), 64-256MB Cache, 180TBW, 3yr Warranty, WD Red 1-6TB (SMR), WD Red Plus 1-14TB (CMR) $69-379

If you are looking to populate a compact, modestly powered, desktop NAS system (so a 1-Bay or 2-Bay NAS drive), then you have quite a large range of Hard Drives on offer. It is worth highlighting though that larger and more enterprise drives (i.e faster and longer warranty) will be noticeably noisier. Additionally, you will need to factor in that your maximum storage is going to be capped at either a single drive OR (in a 2-Bay NAS with RAID 1)  your storage halved to maintain redundancy. Finally, you will need to factor in that most 2-Bay NAS devices will either have a smaller external network connection (1/2.5Gbe) or are not really capable of saturating a full connection externally. So, baring these factors in mind, I would recommend the WD Red series of NAS hard drives for small NAS systems. They do not typically have more aggressive hardware internally, so the ambient noise when these drives are running will be remarkably low.

The performance, due to the lower rotations per minute (RPM) and cache might not seem spectacularly high, but in a 1-Bay or 2-Bay NAS, you likely could not push much performance externally anyway, so why spend much more on something that in most cases you will not be able to take advantage of. Be warned though, as you reach the much higher capacities above 8TB, the general background noise of the drives will increase incrementally.

+ Affordable Price Tag

+ Low Noise and Power Consumption in 24×7 Use

+ Good base level of Capacities Available

– Some Drive feature Shingled Magnetic Recording (SMR)

– Performance is fairly average in the smaller capacities

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

12TB WD Red Plus Western Digital usa USA Buy 2 12TB drives for $379.98. [LINK]
18TB WD Red Pro Western Digital usa USA Buy 2 18TB drives for $549.98. [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

Affordable Hard Drives for a RAID 5 Desktop 4-Bay NAS – Toshiba N300

4-18TB, 7200RPM, 128-512MB Cache, 180 TBW, 3yr Warranty, 1-1.2M MTBF Rating $250-450  

A 4-Bay NAS drive is generally when home and small/medium business users start to take their storage seriously. There are such a wide variety of hardware options that arrive at this storage tier, ranging from powerful Intel/AMD processors and DDR4 memory, to 10Gbe and PCIe upgrades. This arrives with the utility if RAID 5, that allows users to have a much larger potential capacity and performance, but still have a single drive of redundancy to fall back on in the event of drive failure. At this degree of NAS storage, you have a much greater potential to not only largely saturate a 10Gbe connection, but alternatively, you can also look into installing 2.5Gbe and 5Gbe upgrades and fill multiple plus gigabit connections directly or via a switch.  In order to maximize this connection, but to also not max out your budget, I recommend the Toshiba N300 range of Hard Drives. Although they are a brand that is generally held commercially in the 3rd place when it comes to NAS media drives, their N300 range arrives at a similar/lower price point than Seagate Ironwolf and WD Red, but also arrives with 7200RPM on all capacities, with the lowest capacity arriving with 128MB caching and scaling up to 256MB quickly in the series. The increase in RPM will increase the background clicks, hums and whirs of the drive, but at 4-Bays, this is something that the NAS enclosure itself will begin to generate too. A high performing and often overlooked drive that, at the top capacity, can hit performance of up to 274MB/s.

+ Well Priced for a 7200RPM and 128/256/512 Cache Drive

+ Available in up to 18TB, even in non-Pro N300 Series

+ Error Recovery Control

– Will Generate More Noise at 7200RPM

– Not As Widely Available

– Not as well regarded as Seagate or WD

The 3.5-inch N300 NAS Hard Drive offers unprecedented reliability for NAS and other high-performance storage systems. It is optimized to meet the reliability, endurance, performance and scalability requirements of 24-hour x 7-day high-capacity storage for personal, home office and small business use. The N300 is available in capacities of up to 18 TB.

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

Best Hard Drives for a Small Rackmount NAS – WD Red Pro

2-22TB, 7200RPM, 128-512MB Cache, 300TBW, 5yr Warranty $85-429 

Now we move onto the Rackmount NAS compatible hard drives, we have to start looking squarely at two main factors – Performance and Durability. If you are a business or established Prosumer user, then chances are that your NAS system is going to be used for a much larger % per day than most average users. Whether it is for surveillance, virtual machines, business file-sharing or just a combination of all of them every day, you want drives that are going to give you a good level of performance internally AND externally. Likewise, as the hard drives in even a modest rackmount NAS will be on for extended periods, you need to know that the drive can maintain the promising performance indefinitely AND without braking. This is where we start to look at specifications such as TBW (Terabytes Written), Mean time between failure, workload cycles and the warranty in more detail. For those looking at 10Gbe equipped or at least ’10Gbe Ready’ modest rackmount systems, I would recommend the WD Red Pro series of compatible NAS hard drives. Generally, one of the first Pro series NAS hard drives to arrive on the market, the WD Red Pro series is designed for NAS systems up to 24Bays and is available up to 18TB currently.

What did we say about the WD Red Pro 22TB highest tier model? We reviewed it back on September ’22 and whichever way you look at it, the WD Red Pro 22TB Hard drive is a stone-cold WINNER of a drive – both in terms of what it brings to the end user AND what this new 10-platter/OptiNAND drive design means for the future of the WD drive line up. WD does not over promise with this drive (with performance exceeding the brands reported benchmarks in almost every one of my tests, even using mid-range equipment) and they even nailed the price point in line with previous drives in the portfolio (though there is simply no avoiding that you are going to need deep pockets to fully populate any system with these 22TB drives). That said, much like any other WD Red Pro drive, the more industrial architecture still leads to a slightly higher running temp, noisier operation and slight increased power use. This is to be expected, but with no non-Pro alternative available at this capacity, the feasibility of fully populating a smaller scale system with the WD Red Pro 22TB is going to be both expensive AND noisy. I definitely recommend this drive to larger-scale NAS and SAN environments that need sustained RAID performance, high capacity and storage reliability – just maybe buy some earplugs if you plan on working in the same room as them.

Certainly one of the most expensive NAS HDDs out there, but provides a very good level of storage, performance, durability and overall is a very dependable drive for SMB users (Small/Medium Business) that want a drive they can rely on.

+ Top Tier NAS Drive Performance

+ 300TB/Y Workload

+ Build for up to 24-Bay Servers

– Certainly Noiser than non-Pro equivalents

– More Expensive than the Seagate Pro Option

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

18TB WD Red Pro Western Digital usa USA Buy 2 18TB drives for $549.98. [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

Best Hard Drives for an SMB Rackmount NAS 12-Bay – Seagate Ironwolf Pro

4-22TB, 7200RPM, 256MB Cache, 300 TBW (Newer NT version rates at 550TBW), 5yr Warranty, Rescue Data Recovery Services Included $79-399 

When it comes to the move into Rackmount storage for businesses (novices stop here) then not only do you have to only consider Pro/Enterprise-class drives only, but you can also start to look at drives that include certain business level advantages in terms of coverage and service. Much like the non-PRO series of hard drives mentioned earlier, the Seagate Ironwolf Pro series of HDDs include the Rescue+ data recovery services but also includes an impressive 5 years of the manufacturers warranty. However, it is in terms of performance, capacity and durability that the difference between these two ranges become apparent. For a start, the Ironwolf Pro HDD range arrives in capacities of up to 18TB (20TB promised for later in 2021 thanks to Energy Assisted Magnetic Recording), with ALL drives in the PRO range arriving with 7200RPM and 256/512MB of cache. The result is that these drives will hit up to an impressive 260MB/s, which even in smaller RAID 5 groups will easily saturate a 10Gb connection with just 4-5 drives.I performed te sts on 64MB, 256MB, 1GB and 4GB test files, as well as mixed 70/30% R/W. The results were consistent and largely lived up to Seagate’s claims here.

What did we think of the Seagate Ironwolf Pro larger capacities? We reviewed the new NT series (higher durability at 550TBW over 300TBW in the previous revisions) 20TB version and Straight out the gate, the Seagate Ironwolf Pro 20TB HDD comfortably delivers on it’s promises of performance. This alongside full tested and confirmed compatibility with Synology and QNAP NAS devices means that you have a drive here that can turn any 4-Bay NAS into a 60TB RAID5 Storage colossus – let alone once you start thinking about rackmounts and hyperscale. The pricing at the time of writing is a little muddled (the result of having two SKUs/Model IDs floating around in the market and eTailers having to play catch up) but that should hopefully iron out over time. I particularly appreciate that the workload discussion surrounding ‘Pro’ Class drives at 300TB/yr vs rapid HDD capacity growth is being addressed here with a 550TB/yr version to rival that of ‘Ent’ class drives – whatever the reason/motivation. The value of the Ironwolf Health Management tool is going to be something of debate and the inclusion of 3yrs data recovery services is a nice extra that (with any luck) few will need to use – but having them included in a 20TB HDD that still manages to maintain a similar level of Price per TB vs the bulk of NAS HDDs in the Pro tier increases the value notably. As HDDs continue to increase in scale and Seagate (among other brands) continues to outline their plans to hit 50TB by the end of the decade, the Seagate Ironwolf Pro ST2000NT001 is another good example of an HDD that finds a sweet spot between price, durability and value. Just be aware that this is a drive designed for large-scale use and that means high operational noise and higher than typical power use than non-Pro and smaller cap drives!

In recent years we have seen Seagate reshuffle their range of available capacities to align the capacities from 1-12TB to arrive in the standard Ironwolf range and Capacities of up to 18TB and 22TB to arrive on the PRO series (likely due to those larger capacity options requiring the more enterprise hardware as standard and making a non-PRO version impossible without purposely nerf’ing the lesser drives intentionally. There is crossover in 4-12TB models in between, however, the distinction in RPM, cache, build design and TBW rating is wide enough to justify this. The noise level of the Ironwolf HDD series in PRO is noticeable higher, but given these are designed for larger arrays, this noise increase will be less noticeable over the ambient noise of the whole system generally.

+ Excellent Price Point vs Ironwolf NON-Pro in the Portfolio

+ Rescue Data Recovery Services

+ New NT Version Available with 550 TB Annual Workload

+ Seagate Ironwolf Health Management

+ ONLY CMR/PMR Drives in their NAS Range

– Smallest Drive Capacity is 4TB

– Noticeable Boot Up Noise

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

Seagate IronWolf, 8TB ST8000VN002 £185 Amazon usa USA £185 [LINK]
Seagate IronWolf 8TB NAS Internal Hard Drive HDD Amazon usa USA $139.99 [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

 

Best Hard Drives for an Enterprise Rackmount NAS Server – Seagate EXOS

1-24TB, 72000RPM, 256-512MB Cache, SAS & SATA Options, 550 TBW, 5yr Warranty, $99-519   

Now we finally move into the class of hard drive that is more classically defined at ‘Data Center’ and/or Hyperscale environments. Often choosing between a PRO class and Enterprise-class drive can be ticky at a glance. However, Pro class drives generally arrive with a much longer terabytes written rating per year (ie the amount of data that can be written to the drive throughout its lifespan per annum), arrive in numerous interfaces (so both SAS and SATA generally) and typically arrive with numerous format and encryption standard versions available. These are available because some industries and organizations insist on drive media that features in-built protection and secure erase on the drive itself. Of all the enterprise and data centre-class media in the market, I generally recommend the Seagate EXOS series for any hyper scale system environment. They are very, VERY closely followed by the Western Digital UltraStar class of drives, but the Seagate EXOS series is a little clearer to understand, has larger capacity options available earlier, will hopefully release Mach2 version drives in 2021 (dual actuator/arm SATA drives at 400MB/s+) and generally arrive a pinch lower in price too in like-for-like comparisons against the Ultrastar.

Sound Test Video Live Soon (Below)

Recent changes by Synology in their newest 2021 series of rackmounts systems to ONLY support their own range of HDD media has led to their own drives featuring on their own respective hardware, so make sure to check that your intended NAS rackmount system supports Seagate EXOS drives before you head to checkout!

+ Huge Range of Architecture Options (FIPS, Military Encryp, 4KN, SED, SAS and more)

+ Constantly Evolving (Mach 2 versions, x14, x16 & x18 etc)

+ Comparatively Lower in Price vs Ultrastar

+ New 24TB Model (X24) Version Available in 2024

– Range Can Be Confusing

– Availability Can Be Difficult + Some Models Are ‘Bulk Purchase’ Only

– Noisy!

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

Best Hard Drives for a Business Synology NAS – Synology HAT5300

8-18TB, 7200RPM, 256/512MB Cache, 550TBW, 5yr Warranty, Synology System ONLY, Firmware Control on Synology DSM $199-599 

Arriving on the scene in Jan 2021, the Synology branded range of Hard drives for enterprise server use took ALOT of people by surprise! Synology has always had a long-standing reputation with the production of network-attached storage, so in efforts to produce a complete first-party storage system that includes the software, the network hardware AND the media inside is very what their brand has been all about. In their defence too, these are not just cash-grab drives and are in-fact enterprise-class drives that are being priced at PRO series drives (so an Ultrastar/EXOS drive that is at the price tag of a WD Red or Ironwolf Pro). The drives themselves arrive (at launch anyway) with just three capacities available (8TB, 12TB and 16TB) and the architecture of them is quite eye-catching. A 550TBW per year rating, a 2.5Million MTTF, 256/512MB cache and performance ranging across the capacities from 230MB/s to a reported 270MB/s+. The drives are originally Toshiba M06/07/08 Enterprise drives that have a tweaked Synology NAS firmware onboard, so they are geared specifically towards utilization inside the Synology ecosystem. You can even check and upgrade the individual drive firmware directly from with the Synology DSM graphical user interface too, which is quite a unique and convenient feature for those larger arrays with differing drive versions being installed throughout your server’s lifespan.

You cannot really question the quality of the hardware architecture featured on the Synology HAT5300 range of hard drives. We clearly find here a range of drives that have been designed by Toshiba (an HDD vendor with decades of experience and Synology are not being coy about highlighting the partnership on this media), combined with one of the biggest providers of modern NAS in Synology, with media that is tweaked for use within their NAS systems and despite arriving at a Pro series price tag, arrive with hardware far more comparable to that of Seagate EXOS and Western digital Ultrastar hard drives. With a terrifically impressive annual workload, an approach to drive firmware and upgrades relatively unseen from any other drive for NAS’ and remarkable transparency from Synology in the marketing of these drives on day one certainly needs to be acknowledged. Moreover, Synology is not the first brand to champion the use of locked hard drive media in their service systems and they certainly won’t be the last. Overall, I am happy with the new Synology hard drives and despite possible reservations about where the logic of locked drives and exclusivity on this product and range will be extended to in the future (standard class versions?), I still happily recommend the Synology HAT5300 media series alongside other champions of NAS hard drive in 2021.

The move towards hard drive locking by Synology is something that has impressed some and disappointed others – but if you were going to be installing drive media inside a NAS system for business anyway, then ultimately these are still a very solid and well-performing product for you.

+ Enterprise Drives at a PRO class Price

+ 550TBW on ALL Capacities

+ Drive Firmware can be Updated from within the Synology DSM GUI

– Using them in not Synology NAS Hardware is not Supported

– More Expensive than other Enterprise Class HDDs from Seagate & WD

– Noisy Operation

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

Synology DS3622xs+ /144TB HAT5300 12 Bay Amazon UK UK 207.76 OFF (WAS 9771) [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

Best Hard Drives for a Business QNAP NAS – WD Ultrastar

1-18TB, 7200RPM, 256-512MB Cache, 550TBW, 5yr Warranty, FIPS and SED Options, SATA, SAS and U.2 NVMe SSD Options $70-550  

Finally, we move onto possibly the most well known of the enterprise-class of Hard Drives on the market. When it comes to data center and hyper-scale storage environments, Western Digital’s UltraStar range has the same reputation and long-running recognition as IBM has in the computer industry. They have been the go-to drive media of choice in the huge storage environment’s for years, thanks in large part to the fact they have been designed, developed and improved at the same time as the systems they were going into. In recent years, competitors have taken chunks of the market from them (as they are a larger and slightly slower behemoth to suddenly change tactic) and feature larger product runs that have to last extensive lengths of time to facilitate data center replacement media as needed. Nevertheless, in recent years the Ultrastar brand under WD has diversified hugely and alongside the popular WD Gold label has branched into a vast array of interface types, form factors, media variants and scales. Typically the first drive series to crack into a new capacity tier (the first to crack 20TB too).

Sound Test Video Live Soon (Below)

The Ultrastar series of hard drives will often be compared against the WD Red Pro range of NAS hard drives when considering populating a server. It is worth remembering that the Ultrastar series is designed for both a higher performance AND a much more enduring performance – i.e it can maintain that level, as well as switch between processes, for much longer. Indeed in testing, the Ultrastar even features a much higher Read and Write performance than pretty much any other drive that peaks as high as 280MB/s in our ATTO DiskBenchmark testing below with just a single HDD. Even the IOs (IOPS_ went as high as 19,000, which although low when compared with modern high-end SSDs, for a single HDD is really impressive).

The drives themselves are fantastically dull in appearance of course, as one might expect from the enterprise tier and also feature quite an aggressive spin up noise. However, in much larger scale environments, you will almost certainly not hear the drive media over the ambient system fan noise. Overall still an oldie but a goodie!

+ Consistently High Performance

+ Well-established HDD Drive and Brand

+ Numerous Interfaces, in-Drive Encryption Systems and Choices

– DEFINITELY one of the most confusing product ranges

– Noticeably Noisy at boot

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

Best Hard Drives for a Home or Small Business 2023/2024 Gen Synology NAS – Synology HAT3300 Plus Series

4/6/8/12TB, 5900-7200RPM, 64-256MB Cache, 180TBW, 3yr Warranty, Synology NAS Designed, Firmware Update in DSM $109-189 

There is most certainly a clear design choice here to mirror that of the existing regular-class server drives on the market right now. The Synology HAT 3300+ series has been reported several times, not just here on the blog, to be built using Seagate Iron Wolf drive media with specific Synology firmware on board. Arriving with 180-terabyte annual workloads, 5400rpm, 256-megabyte cache, arriving in a CMR architecture and air-sealed – the specifications we see here are all quite standard. The 12TB benefits from an increased RPM and helium sealing, as per most 12 TB drives in the market, but apart from that the Synology Plus hard drive series are going to run quieter than most pro or enterprise-class drives, as well as have a slightly lower power consumption, but are also going to have a slight performance decrease than that of the HAT5300 and HAT3300. But that is only going to be of significance in larger RAID configurations realistically.

The differences between the Synology HAT3300, HAT5300/HAS5300 are pretty much exactly as you would find if you compared WD Red and Seagate IronWolf versus that of Seagate Exos and WD Ultrastar. Indeed, I am a little surprised that Synology has not introduced a middle ground in the form of a pro series drive, but perhaps this is something that will roll out later down the line. Nevertheless, this results in quite a void of performance, durability, and scale between these two ranges when compared to long-term established server hard drive ranges from these other companies filling the gaps of capacity and pro middle ground choices. It should be immediately highlighted that regardless of which Synology hard drive you opt for, you still benefit from firmware updates being actionable from within the Synology DSM software, easier and more streamlined warranty support, and firmware optimization that is specifically tailored towards Synology hardware deployment. We have discussed this at length previously when discussing the Synology enterprise hard drives and SSDs, and although you pay a premium for Synology’s own branded drives when compared to third-party alternatives that people have been using for decades, there are nonetheless merits in using drives specifically geared towards your NAS system rather than requiring a slightly broader design that suits more diverse servers. Here is how the Synology enterprise SATA, enterprise SAS, and mid-range plus hard drives differ in their specifications:

 
Classification Enterprise SATA Enterprise SAS Domestic SATA
Series Name Enterprise/XS Enterprise/XS PLUS
Model HAT5300 HAS5300 HAT3300
Interface SATA 6Gb SAS 12Gb SATA 6Gb
Recording CMR/PMR CMR/PMR CMR/PMR
Capacity (5/23) 4/8/12/16/18TB 8/12/16/18TB 4/6/8/12TB
RPM 7200RPM 7200RPM 5400RPM (7200 on 12TB)
Cache 256/512MB 256/512MB 256MB
Sector Size 512e 512e 512e
Max Transfer Speed (Capacity Dependant) 254/260/253/274/281MB/s 241/253/274MB/s 202/240MB/s
Drive Sealing AIR/AIR/Helium/Helium/Helium AIR/Helium/Helium/Helium AIR/AIR/AIR/Helium
Power Use (Idle) 4.07/5.61/4.25/4.00/4.16W 6.62/4.36/4.46W 3.96/3.4/3.4/5.07W
Power Use (Active) 7.76/9.29/7.83/7.63/8.35W 9.87/7.80/8.12W 4.85/5.3/5.3/8.33W
Load/Unload Cycles 600K 600K 600K
Workload Rating 550TB (Annual) 550TB (Annual) 180TB (Annual)
MTBF (Hrs) 2.0/2.5Million 2.5Million 1Million
Warranty 5 Years 5 Years 3 Years

+ Much more affordable than the HAT5300 Series

+ Better range off smaller capacities than HAT5300

+ Drive Firmware can be Updated from within the Synology DSM GUI

– Not Supported on Bigger Synology NAS Systems (eg XS or SA Series)

– Lacks Data Recovery Service of Seagate Ironwolf HDDs

– 12TB Maximum Capacity (at time of writing)

DEAL WATCH Is It On Offer Right Now?

Synology 1-Bay DiskStation DS124 Bundle with 1 x HAT3300-4T Amazon usa USA 20 OFF (WAS 270) [LINK]
Synology 1-Bay DiskStation DS124 with 1 x HAT3300-6T Amazon usa USA 25 OFF (WAS 325) [LINK]

These Offers are Checked Daily

IMPORTANT! Compatibility of Hard Drives with Synology NAS Systems

An increasingly important factor when selecting NAS hard drives is their compatibility with specific NAS systems. Over the last 18-24 months, there has been a noticeable trend, especially with Synology, towards reducing the range of compatible, supported, or verified HDDs. Synology has shown a preference for their own HAT3300 and HAT5300 drives, somewhat limiting the choice for users of their systems. This shift marks a departure from the traditionally open approach where most NAS brands, including Synology, supported a wide range of third-party drives.

This change in policy is significant for users needing specific storage solutions or those accustomed to a broader choice of drives. It contrasts with other NAS brands, which continue to support a variety of third-party drives, including the latest high-capacity models. When choosing a NAS hard drive in 2023/2024, it’s crucial to consider not just the drive’s specifications but also its compatibility with your NAS system. This ensures that you can take full advantage of the NAS’s features and avoid potential compatibility issues.

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today’s video. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

The Topton N305 NAS Motherboard – Hardware Deep Dive Review

Par : Rob Andrews
15 mars 2024 à 15:00

The Topton N305 NAS Motherboard+CPU Combo – Should You Buy It?

If you have come to this article on the Topton N305 NAS Motherboard, then chances are you are a very specific kind of NAS user! When you want to build your own NAS from scratch, there is always the balance between POWER and POWER EFFICIENCY! The former, means you can get so much more done, as quickly as possible – the latter is a pursuit to ensure that this 24×7 DiY NAS server is not going to cost you a small fortune in electricity costs! Until recently, the 2020/2021 released Topton N5105/N6005 NAS+Mobo combo was considered the best balance in the market to provide a fair balance of performance, capability and power efficiency. However, because Intel has moved forward with its refresh of their processors into the newer generation (largely killing off the Intel Celeron and Pentium naming) AND brands such as Topton have now vastly improved their development techniques, many MANY eyes have now moved over to the newer Topton Intel N305 and N100 NAS Motherboard. Most ‘Build Your Own’ (BYO) NAS buyers are considering this highly praised little M-ITX combo for their new Plex Build, their new modest Container/VM server with Proxmox, or scaling up from a private cloud to a 5-6 drive UnRAID or TrueNAS server! But, is the N305 NAS motherboard actually any good? What are the main differences to consider between the N305 and N100 model? And is it reliable enough for your data? In this article we dig into the hardware and share what we find!

Note – You can watch the Topton N305 full hardware review and dive HERE on YouTube

Additionally, find our lists of the recommended NAS CPU+Mobo Combos HERE on NASCompares in a dedicated article

Where to Buy

(Amazon / Aliexpress)

ALIEXPRESS $279 HERE (Upgrades Available)

Amazon $348 HERE (Board Only)

Component Specification
Processor Intel Alder Lake-N i3-N305
Memory 1x SO-DIMM DDR5 4800MHz, up to 16/32GB
Storage 2x M.2 NVMe 3×1 Slot, 2x SATA3
PCIe Slot PCIe 3×1 (cut)
Graphics Intel UHD Graphics
Display Outputs 2x HDMI, 1x DP, 1x Type-C (all 4096 x 2160@60Hz)
Network Card 4x Intel i226-V 2.5G
4G LTE/SIM Yes
Wireless? MICROPCIe Slot (Shared with PCIe 3×1 Slot)
USB Ports 5x USB2.0, 1x USB3 via FPanel and Pins
Cooling Passive cooling with fanless heatsink
BIOS AMI EFI BIOS with various supports
TDP 9-15W
Power Input DC 12V (External PSU option)
Case Material Aluminium Alloy
Expansion PWM fan power connector, TPM Pin
Dimensions 158.0mm x 126.5mm x 60.2mm
Color Black or Gray (random)
Installation Desktop, Wall-mounted
Operating Environment 0°C to 70°C, 5%-85% Humidity

 


Topton N305 DiY NAS CPU+MoBo Combo – Hardware Design

The Topton N305 Board is offered on Aliexpress with various pricing options based on the included components. The basic package, which includes just the CPU and motherboard, is priced at $319. For an additional $10, customers can obtain the package with a SAS fan-out cable for enhanced storage capabilities, totalling $329. The most comprehensive option includes everything mentioned plus an external PSU, available for $359. This tiered pricing structure provides flexibility for buyers based on their specific needs and desired configurations.

The latest version of the Topton N305 ITX motherboard now includes a metal, high quality fan-assisted heatsink. This new feature aims to enhance cooling efficiency for the system. It’s a significant update for those looking for improved thermal management in their ITX setups.

The N305 CPU, a central component of Topton’s latest NAS and DiY switch motherboard, showcases Intel’s innovative engineering through its Alder Lake-N architecture, catering specifically to efficiency and performance. With its Intel 7 lithography, the processor strikes a balance between power consumption and computational prowess, offering a TDP of 9-15W. This optimization allows for reduced energy usage while maintaining high performance, making it an ideal choice for NAS systems where efficiency is paramount.

Embedded within the motherboard, the N305 CPU supports advanced memory capabilities, including DDR5, ensuring broad compatibility and future-proofing for evolving storage technologies. The processor’s ability to handle up to 16GB of memory alongside its versatile support for various memory speeds up to 4800 MHz underlines its capacity to manage intensive data transactions and storage operations. This flexibility is crucial for NAS applications, which demand rapid access to and processing of voluminous data sets.

Furthermore, the integration of Intel UHD Graphics within the CPU provides substantial support for multimedia tasks, extending the motherboard’s utility beyond mere storage. This feature, coupled with the processor’s support for multiple displays and high-definition outputs, enables the N305 NAS Motherboard to serve as a central hub for not only storage but also media streaming and light graphical tasks. The inclusion of advanced technologies like Intel Quick Sync Video highlights the CPU’s adeptness at encoding and decoding video streams efficiently, thereby enhancing the functionality of NAS systems built with the N305 motherboard for a variety of applications.

The Topton N305 NAS Motherboard incorporates a single SO-DIMM slot for memory, strategically located on the motherboard’s rear, optimizing space and accessibility. This design choice underscores the board’s compact and efficient layout, catering to users seeking a balance between performance and form factor in their NAS solutions. However, it’s important to note that this system does not support ECC (Error-Correcting Code) memory. The absence of ECC support is typical for systems prioritizing cost-effectiveness and simplicity over the error correction capabilities critical in enterprise-level servers. Despite this, the motherboard’s memory compatibility, supporting up to 32GB of DDR5 RAM at speeds of 4800MHz (and compatibility with 5200/5600MHz), ensures robust performance for various NAS applications.

At the top section of the Mini-ITX NAS motherboard, there are two distinct SATA connection ports available for direct drive connections. Additionally, it features an SFF-8643 output. This output enables the connection of four more SATA drives. The connectivity expansion is facilitated through a compatible cable.

The motherboard utilizes a JMB585 controller for enhanced SATA drive management, bridging the gap between PCIe hosts and SATA/AHCI storage devices. This integration allows the board to support five SATA ports through the JMB585, enhancing its storage capabilities.

The controller also enables Port Multiplier support, significantly expanding potential storage configurations. This setup is particularly beneficial for users looking to maximize their storage options, offering a versatile solution for a variety of storage needs.

Example:

It supports command-based switching (CBS) and FIS (Frame Information Structure)-based switching (FBS). JMB585 also support TRIM to the SSD and can transmit and receive data by both of AHCI mode and legacy IDE mode to and from the host respectively.

Although this review is of the DC output version of the Topton N305 NAS board, there is also two 4-POWER (12V) connectors at the rear corner of the motherboard to supply additional power for bulk storage needs as required in some enclosures and backplanes.

This review focuses on the DC output variant of the Topton N305 NAS motherboard. Additionally, it features two 4-POWER (12V) connectors located at the rear corner. These connectors are designed to supply extra power for extensive storage needs. This capability is especially useful in certain enclosures and backplanes where additional power is necessary for bulk storage management.

The Topton N305 DC motherboard is supplied with an external power supply unit (PSU), specifically a 180W model produced by Chicony, a name that may not be familiar to all. No, me neither…

The fan-assisted CPU cooling system on the Topton N305 NAS motherboard receives commendation for its efficiency, producing minimal noise while maintaining a surprisingly low profile. This design choice enhances the overall user experience by ensuring effective thermal management without adding bulk or disruptive sound to the setup.

The N305 NAS motherboard facilitates M.2 NVMe storage through two 2280 slots. These slots are strategically located on the rear or base of the motherboard for easy access and efficient space utilization. This configuration allows for high-speed storage solutions to be incorporated seamlessly into the system, enhancing its performance capabilities.

The M.2 connectors on the N305 NAS motherboard are specified as PCIe Gen 3×1, providing a maximum bandwidth of 1000MB/s for each slot. While it may be seen as a drawback that 3×4 NVMe drives will operate in these 3×1 slots, limiting their maximum speed, this configuration remains noteworthy. Considering the motherboard’s compact scale and the overall allocation of 9 PCIe lanes, the inclusion of these connectors and their performance capability is still an impressive feat, balancing system expansion with available resources.

Our examination through SSH terminal within UnRAID has verified the configuration of the slots. It’s confirmed that they operate at the downgraded bandwidth of 3×1. This adjustment aligns with the system’s specifications and ensures compatibility within its infrastructure.

During our disk speed tests on the motherboard, a standard PCIe 3×4 NVMe drive was tested using a 1GB file. The results showed a sequential read/write speed of approximately 750-780MB/s. This performance is indicative of the operational bandwidth limits imposed by the 3×1 slot configuration on the motherboard.

In our tests transferring data between two M.2 NVMe drives with a 1GB file, the speeds achieved ranged from 320-330MB/s. This suggests that the two NVMe slots share a single lane or path on the motherboard. The shared pathway is likely the reason for these specific transfer speeds, indicating a bottleneck at the shared connection point.

Located at the front-bottom of the motherboard is a PCIe slot, specifically designed for further system enhancements and expansions. This slot opens up opportunities for additional upgrades, allowing users to customize their setups according to their specific needs. It represents a key feature for those looking to extend the motherboard’s capabilities beyond its initial configuration.

The PCIe slot on the motherboard operates with Gen 3×1 specifications, offering a maximum bandwidth of 1,000MB/s. Despite this limitation, it has been physically designed to accommodate longer cards, such as x4, x8, or x16. This thoughtful design ensures compatibility with a wider range of expansion cards, providing users with greater flexibility in upgrading their systems. It is something of a compromise between bandwidth capability and physical compatibility, enhancing the motherboard’s adaptability for various use cases. The limitations in PCIe speed and lane allocation on the motherboard stem from the CPU’s architecture, which provides 8-9 lanes. This constraint not only affects the N305 model but also has implications for the N100 version of the motherboard and CPU NAS combo. The lane count directly influences the number and types of devices that can be supported concurrently, impacting overall system expandability and performance. This highlights the importance of the CPU’s lane capacity in determining the motherboard’s capability for expansions and upgrades.

Located on the back of the motherboard is a MINIPCIe slot, primarily intended for adding a wireless network card. This slot, while versatile, is not suitable for a wide range of other expansions. Its inclusion provides an option for wireless connectivity, enhancing the board’s functionality without significantly diversifying its expansion capabilities. The MINIPCIe slot located at the rear of the motherboard is shared with the main PCIe 3×1 slot, meaning they cannot be used simultaneously. This configuration limits the ability to expand the system’s connectivity and upgrade capabilities at the same time. Users must choose between utilizing the MINIPCIe slot for wireless networking or the PCIe slot for other expansions, highlighting a trade-off in the motherboard’s design for flexibility versus functionality.

In an interesting move, likely catering to prosumer uses like pfsense and OpenWRT builds, the motherboard includes a 4G LTE/SIM card slot. This addition is somewhat unexpected but expands the board’s utility by enabling direct cellular network access. It suggests a broader vision for the motherboard’s applications, potentially appealing to users requiring remote or backup internet connectivity. Integrating the 4G LTE/SIM card slot for cellular network access into NAS systems like UnRAID may present challenges, as such operating systems might not support this type of cellular network interface. This limitation underscores the importance of verifying compatibility with the intended NAS OS to ensure full functionality of the onboard features. The presence of cellular connectivity options expands the potential use cases for the motherboard, although users must navigate the constraints of OS support.

The motherboard is equipped with four 2.5GbE network ports, each powered by an Intel i226-V controller. This setup significantly enhances the board’s networking capabilities, providing robust, high-speed connections suitable for demanding network environments. The inclusion of multiple 2.5GbE ports allows for flexible network configurations and supports advanced networking features, making it an ideal choice for users looking for high-performance networking options in their NAS setups. The integrated network card on the motherboard enables it to achieve a default network bandwidth of over 1GB per second. This high capacity can be distributed across multiple client devices or utilized fully by a single device through advanced networking techniques such as SMB3, load balancing, LAG, or trunking with a compatible smart switch.

This feature significantly enhances the motherboard’s network performance, catering to both distributed and concentrated network demands. Integrating a 10GbE NIC upgrade into the motherboard’s PCIe 3×1 slot could potentially elevate the network bandwidth to 2GB or 2000MB/s. This enhancement would leverage the available PCIe slot to significantly boost the networking capabilities of the system. Such an upgrade indicates a strong potential for achieving superior network performance, making the system well-suited for high-demand networking tasks. The performance ceiling for the two NVMe drives on the motherboard, even when configured in RAID 0/1, is around 1000MB/s. Meanwhile, connecting 5-6 SATA drives, depending on whether they are HDDs or SATA SSDs, can result in varying performance. With HDDs, expect around 600-800MB/s, and with SATA SSDs, performance can reach up to 1000-1100MB/s. This variation is due to the JMB585 SATA controller operating on a Gen 3 lane, influencing the overall throughput of connected storage devices.

The motherboard is designed with an abundance of USB ports, catering to various connectivity needs. Among these, two ports are uniquely positioned internally, providing a convenient option for connecting an OS boot drive directly on the motherboard. This feature enhances the flexibility and functionality of the system, allowing for streamlined setup and efficient use of space.

The motherboard features six USB 2.0 ports in total, with four positioned on the rear and two internally on the board, designed for versatile connectivity options, including the possibility of an OS boot drive connection. Additionally, it supports USB 3.2 connectivity through front panel and internal pins, expanding its compatibility with faster USB devices.

The motherboard is equipped with HDMI 2.0 and DisplayPort 1.4 outputs, supporting 4K resolution at 60FPS. This capability ensures high-quality video output for tasks requiring detailed visuals. Such features make the board suitable for applications beyond traditional computing tasks, including media playback and content creation that demands high-resolution displays.

We conducted a video analysis of the Topton N305 NAS Motherboard+CPU combo, exploring its BIOS features and conducting various tests using UnRAID. This in-depth examination aimed to understand the motherboard’s capabilities, performance, and how it handles in different scenarios, particularly focusing on its compatibility and performance with UnRAID as a potential NAS solution. This process provided valuable insights into its suitability for various computing tasks and its overall performance metrics.

The Topton N305 NAS Motherboard+CPU Combo – Should You Buy It?

As of 2024, the Topton N305 NAS motherboard stands out for its balance between power efficiency and functionality, especially at its price range. Its CPU, with a flexible TDP ranging from 9 to 15 watts, impressively manages to offer an 8-core, 8-thread configuration capable of reaching up to 3.8 GHz per core. This makes it an excellent choice for tasks like 4K transcoding on a Plex Media Server, with the potential to handle 8K content thanks to its integrated graphics hitting 1.25 GHz. Despite the limitation of having only 9 PCIe Gen 3 lanes, the design efficiently allocates these resources, supporting up to six SATA drives, two M.2 slots, and a PCIe expansion slot, all on a compact MITX board. While the N100 version presents a more cost-effective and slightly less powerful alternative, the modest increase in power consumption of the N305 variant justifies its higher performance capability, making it a superior choice for those needing a more potent setup. The N305’s design, which mirrors the physical and lane layout of the N100 while significantly enhancing performance, demonstrates an impressive achievement in maximizing the utility and efficiency of a small form factor motherboard.

Where to Buy

(Amazon / Aliexpress)

ALIEXPRESS $279 HERE (Upgrades Available)

Amazon $348 HERE (Board Only)

Component Specification
Processor Intel Alder Lake-N i3-N305
Memory 1x SO-DIMM DDR5 4800MHz, up to 16/32GB
Storage 2x M.2 NVMe 3×1 Slot, 2x SATA3
PCIe Slot PCIe 3×1 (cut)
Graphics Intel UHD Graphics
Display Outputs 2x HDMI, 1x DP, 1x Type-C (all 4096 x 2160@60Hz)
Network Card 4x Intel i226-V 2.5G
4G LTE/SIM Yes
Wireless? MICROPCIe Slot (Shared with PCIe 3×1 Slot)
USB Ports 5x USB2.0, 1x USB3 via FPanel and Pins
Cooling Passive cooling with fanless heatsink
BIOS AMI EFI BIOS with various supports
TDP 9-15W
Power Input DC 12V (External PSU option)
Case Material Aluminium Alloy
Expansion PWM fan power connector, TPM Pin
Dimensions 158.0mm x 126.5mm x 60.2mm
Color Black or Gray (random)
Installation Desktop, Wall-mounted
Operating Environment 0°C to 70°C, 5%-85% Humidity

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

UGREEN Brand User Q&A – Questions About the New DXP NASync NAS Storage Solution

Par : Rob Andrews
14 mars 2024 à 16:00

Your Questions for UGREEN about their New NAS Solution

IMPORTANT March 22 UpdateThe UGREEN DXP4800 PLUS NAS Review is NOW LIVE, watch it HERE, read it HERE and learn about the Software HERE and HERE

With UGREEN still in the process of launching their Kickstarter campaign for a new NAS Storage Solution (the DXP NASync series) to market, many users (myself included) have a lot of questions about the product. Let’s face it, we are not talking about a standard ‘over the counter’ purchase where – this is CROWDFUNDING! Therefore, users need to take extra care and caution before considering putting down money (remember, crowdfunding is not the same as eRetail!). Alot of users want to know just what the UGREEN DXP NAS Storage solution can do, what it can’t do, UGREEN’s plans for the future and…at a very basic level… is the UGREEN NAS actually a ‘thing’! People have been burnt by crowdfunding before, plus UGREEN has no previous recognized experience in the world of NAS, They are definitely SIGNIFICANTLY more established in the tech market (12 years) than many other crowdfunded NAS/Private Cloud solutions that have popped up in the last 1-2 years to challenge the likes of Synology and QNAP, but this is their first NAS. Heck, it’s actually 4-5 different NAS’ arriving at launch – that’s a big, big undertaking! So, l asked you guys to fire me over as many questions as possible to ask the brand directly, and you did not disappoint! I have taken the many, MANY questions that were submitted and condensed them into the 20 questions below. With the crowdfunding launch for their product arriving towards the end of the month. many of the questions below represent users’ reservations and dealbreakers before they are prepared to engage with the brand, the solution and the launch! So, let’s go through the brand’s responses to your Questions.

UGREEN NAS Brand Q&A – The TL;DR

IMPORTANT – The Ugreen Q&A Video goes into ALOT more detail in the responses to each question, so if you want MORE detail, then do watch it HERE and use the chapters on the bottom of the video

I GET IT! You are in a rush! So, here is the short version, the skinny, the cliff notes! I asked 20 questions in total (slightly more in the zoom recording coming to YouTube), and here is the summary of their answers in bullet points:

  • Kickstarter Launch: UGREEN chose Kickstarter to engage with consumers early, gather feedback before official launch, and because other well-known brands have also launched products via crowdfunding.
  • Connectivity: The NAS device supports Thunderbolt connection for host use only, with plans to expand its capabilities. WiFi 6E support on the DXP480T Flash system allows connections both to and from the system, as well as to a router.
  • Third-Party OS Installation: Installing third-party operating systems, like UnRAID or TrueNAS, is not officially supported and voids the warranty. *Update on the use of 3rd Party OS’ on UGREEN NAS with hardware, with regard to warranty*: “The Ugreen team confirms that whatever is promised in their warranty policy will not change, which only covers the hardware. They also mention that there is a risk of damage if you install a third-party OS, including data loss and compatibility issues, etc.” – Ugreen Representative, 26/3/24
  • Availability: Initially, the product is available only in Germany, with plans to expand to more regions based on demand.
  • Security: UGREEN is focusing on financial-grade security standards, working on EN303645 and TruestE certification, and plans to enhance security features continuously.
  • Additional Options and Hardware Information: A PledgeBox option will be added during the campaign for adding HDDs and SSDs. Detailed PCIe lane layouts will be available in the product manuals.
  • Remote Access: The UGREEN Link service allows remote access to the NAS via a custom domain name after account registration.
  • Power Consumption: Details on power consumption will be included in the product manual, with specifics available upon request.
  • Kickstarter Campaign Delay: The campaign was delayed to incorporate user feedback on the app for a better user experience.
  • UGREEN OS Features: Support for automatic on/off schedules, SSD caching, full phone storage backup, online data scrubbing/checksumming with BTRFS, and basic to complex RAID configurations.
  • Native Applications and Functions: The NAS will feature a smart assistant for AI-based smart recognition and classification, virtualization, Docker support, and NFS protocol support, but lacks iSCSI support.
  • Future Developments: Some features, like full phone backup and virtualization/Docker support, are still under development.

So, some GOOD news, some BAD news and some ‘TBC’ news. Let’s dig more into the actual Q&A itself and go through those questions, one by one.

The Q&A with UGREEN – Answering Your Questions about their NAS Solution

Below is the written response provided to me by the HQ (handled by Diana An, a Marketing Specialist in conjunction with their product management teams) of UGREEN after submitting my questions, collected from user comments (HERE and HERE) between March 4th and 10th 2024. There is also a Zoom session with UGREEN that will be live soon/now that goes into much greater detail and analysis of these questions and answers, conducted with Hernan Lopez, a U.S.-based UGREEN representative. Questions were provided in advance to UGREEN 48 hours in advance of the Zoom session (timezone dependent) in order to allow UGREEN time to sufficiently source adequate answers. The questions and answers below are provided unedited and unchallenged, but further investigation was conducted in the Zoom recording that is/will be available on the NASCompares Youtube Channel HERE. I should also add that UGREEN has provided me with a DXP4800 PLUS and a DXP480T NAS unit for testing and evaluation, which I will be publishing videos and articles on later this month (hopefully, prior to the launch of the campaign) in order to evaluate these pre-release units and assess the quality of the hardware, software and viability of the solution.

Additionally, I would like to thank the many channel viewers and subscribers for providing the questions for this Q&A. There were around 100+ in total, so I was forced to consolidate them (merging similar/identical questions together, or answering less debated/unanswered questions in those comments of the initial posts (again, see HERE and HERE). Questions below have been credited to numerous YouTube members (denoted by the @ prefix, with my own name there too), but in many cases, the questions were asked by many, many users (eg why Kickstarter?), so I have attributed to just the first 2-3 users). Here is the Q&A:


Why Kickstarter?

  • Why Is UGREEN bringing this NAS solution to Kickstarter/Crowdfunding? UGREEN is an established brand, so why use Crowdfunding for this new product line?

@grege9862 , @InspectorGadget2014

Firstly, The UGREEN NASync is our new product line and we can have pre-connection and pre-communication with the consumers and get their feedback in advance before we bring it on Kickstarter. Secondly, many well-known brands also launched their new product line on kickstarter/Crowdfunding.


  • How is the Thunderbolt connection handled, is it host-only use, or can you connect to it over Thunderbolt (point to point) with a Mac or Windows system?

@michaelpaolini , @ajrfilm9951

Currently, Thunderbolt connection for our device is host only, and can be used for external storage. But some features like Thunderbolt Networking are in our development plan.


  • Same question as above, but for the WiFi 6E support on the DXP480T Flash system – Does this allow connections both TOO the system from a user AND connections for the NAS to a Router?

@DIGIBITE (Eddie!)

The wifi on our 480T device supports both functions above.


  • Is installing 3rd Party OS’, such as UnRAID and TrueNAS, possible and will UGREEN still support the user’s hardware 2-year warranty if they do so?

(@LacayoDe , @herbentroost427, @ghostbaleada , @misku_ , @ttuschak

UPDATE 26/03/24 The position of UGREEN on the use of 3rd Party OS Use on their NAS hardware (with regard to hardware warranty) has changed since this Q&A.: “The Ugreen team confirms that whatever is promised in their warranty policy will not change, which only covers the hardware. They also mention that there is a risk of damage if you install a third-party OS, including data loss and compatibility issues, etc.” – Ugreen Representative, 26/3/24

Unfortunately, modifying the built-in system is not officially supported. It’s not suggested to do so. If users insist on doing it, they will lose the warranty permanently.


  • Why is the Product currently only available to buyers in Germany and the United States, and not the rest of Europe, Australia, and more? Will this change?

@TheFric , @rogerwagner8498 , @ghostbaleada , @misku_ , @herbentroost427 , @ajrfilm9951

Our products are still in their infancy, and when expectations are good, we will gradually expand markets in more regions.


  • What provisions and plans do UGREEN have in place for their systems with regard to security? i.e what is “Financial Grade Security”, will they be publishing security advisories, pen testing, etc?

@michaelpaolini

We will be referring to Professional-grade security standards and continuously optimizing and improving the system’s security features. Currently we are also working on the certification of EN303645 and TruestE.

NOTE from Robbie – This question was expanded upon in the YouTube Q&A, and I recommend watching HERE for a fuller response to this question


  • Will UGREEN be adding a PledgeBox option during their campaign to allow users to add HDDs and SSDs?

@famoussasjohn

Yes, we will add the PledgeBox option during the campaign.


Source www.techpowerup.com
  • Can you provide a breakdown of the PCIe lane layout of each system?

@Latino3650 , @GroundDwellerStudioS

We will have hardware product manuals that will contain device information. The product manual is currently in the editing process. Which model of product do you want to know about? We can send it to you separately first.


  • How will remote access to the UGREEN NAS be conducted via UGREEN services?

@michaelpaolini

To use the UGREEN Link service, you need to register a UGREEN Link account first, then log in to the control panel of the NAS device and set a custom domain name. After applying the settings, you will be assigned the corresponding domain name for remote access.


  • Can you provide further clarification on the power consumption of your devices, even as a level benchmark of a fully populated device during active/passive activity?

@Butyouveheardofme3486 , iVuehl

This information will be described in the product manual, similar to the PCIe issue. If you would like to know about a specific model, we can send it to you separately.


  • Why was the launch of your Kickstarter campaign delayed?

@nascompares

During the public beta period, we collected some user experience optimization suggestions for the App. And we hope to deliver a version with a better experience to everyone, so we delayed the launch for half a month.


  • Does the UGREEN os allow automatic on/off schedule

@overclocked9033

Yes, UGREEN OS supports this schedule and you can customise it in the control panel.


  • Is SSD Cache Supported?

@Fan_de_Parcs

Yes

Yes, you can use a SSD either for cache or storage usage. However, you can’t use the same drive for both caching and storage purposes.


  • Will the mobile software support full phone storage backup?

@Fan_de_Parcs

Yes, this backup function is in our plan and still under development.


  • Does their native OS use a filesystem that can do online data scrubbing / checksumming to detect errors? e.g. BTRFS or ZoL

@Dreamslacker

UGREEN OS supports BTRFS in terms of data scrubbing / checksumming.


  • Will RAID expansion be possible (i.e adding more drives to an existing RAID Pool)

Not possible yet.

(NOTE FROM Me/ Robbie – In a recent software update, I found that a new option is in place for expansions, but it is still WiP. It seems to only reflect INSIDE the system and not a physically connected external expansion however, i.e needs empty bays. See Below)


  • Will you be providing/supporting a flexible RAID system (comparable to Synology Hybrid RAID or Terramaster TRAID)?

@doppelherz

Basic,JBOD,Raid0,Raid1,Raid5,Raid6,Raid10 are supported.


  • On their Kickstarter page is mention of an AI integrated smart assistant, we are curious to know what that means?

@thomasm964

AI Smart Recognition & Classification(without Internet connection), search Pictures by Text. Search for photos of pets, fruits, vehicles or more simply by entering search keywords. Use smart recognition to create photo albums that intelligently identify and classify faces, places, animals, and more. AI service are going to operate in-system and without internet connectivity. If an app or service is installed on the system that requires internet connectivity, this will be made clear in the app release notes and controllable on the system GUI


  • Will there be virtualization and docker support out of the box?

@cyberlando

Yes, virtualization and docker will support out of the box. However, this is still early stage of our beta and these 2 functions are still under development.


  • What is the support/status of NFS Support or iSCSI Target/LUNs?

@dozix88

UGREEN NAS supports the NFS protocol, including NFSv3, NFSv4, NFSv4.1, while iSCSI is not supported.


How much will the UGreen NASync Series Cost and When Will It Launch?

The UGreen NASync series is poised to make a notable entrance into the NAS market with a range of devices that cater to different storage and performance needs. With the Kickstarter launch prices set attractively at $239.99 for the entry-level DXP2800 and scaling up to $899.99 for the high-end DXP8800 Plus, UGreen is competitively positioning its products. The mid-range DXP4800 and DXP4800 Plus are tagged at $359.99 and $419.99 respectively, while the specialized NVMe-focused DXP480T Plus is introduced at $479.99. Post-crowdfunding, the retail prices, also known as the Manufacturer’s Suggested Retail Price (MSRP), are expected to be significantly higher—almost doubling for some models, like the DXP2800 with an MSRP of $399 and the DXP8800 Plus which will retail for $1499. This pricing strategy not only provides an incentive for early backers but also underscores the value proposition of getting in early on the Kickstarter campaign. Nevertheless, THIS IS CROWDFUNDING and therefore not the same as buying from your usual retail outlet, be aware. UGreen is tapping into the growing buzz of middle-ground solutions between turnkey options from Synology/QNAP and BYO/DiY options that retire time and knowledge to build. If you are on the fence, there isn’t a tremendous rush, as crowdfunding officially begins on March 26th (see link below). We will be keeping an eye on this one as the weeks go on!

Click the Link Below to find out more about the UGREEN NASync NAS Series on the brand’s official Site:


 

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology DS Video and Video Station VS Plex Media Server

Par : Rob Andrews
11 mars 2024 à 18:00

Plex Media Server Vs Synology Video Station on a NAS

One of the most popular reasons that users choose to buy a network-attached storage (NAS) device is for use as a media server. The appeal is pretty clear. With most users now owning decades of media (either in digital form or ripped from optical media at home), the ability to enjoy these box sets and Movies on the latest devices can be complicated. Despite this, streaming all of your multimedia from a NAS to all of your TVs, phones, tablets and other devices are growing increasingly popular and a lot of this is thanks to the increasing affordability of NAS from brands like Synology and QNAP and free software from companies like Plex and Emby. The most popular NAS for home media tends to be Synology, with its support of numerous media server applications and its own premium video service app too. This combined with the oversaturation of third-party online streaming services that ask you to pay a subscription (such as Netflix) with little control or right to ownership of the media you watch means that many users just want to enjoy their own unique media collections. So now that a lot of users are choosing to switch from the likes of Netflix and Prime Video towards an in-house media server, the next question is which piece of software they should choose.

The most popular private media server app right now worldwide to counter the likes of Netflix is Plex Media Server, software available in host and client form that allows you to transform your media collection into a glossy, slick and informative UI that genuinely rivals big online streaming platforms. Synology on the other hand would likely prefer users to stick with their own fully-featured media server application, Synology Video Station, which they have invested well in and developed to an impressive standard that easily rivals that of Plex. So today I want to compare these two media server choices and help you decide which one is the ideal media server choice for you.

Important – ‘Free’ Vs Paid Media Server Services on a NAS

Before going any further, it is worth addressing the elephant in the room, namely that a number of key media server services that are included with Plex Media Server are locked behind a paid subscription service known as Plex Pass. Whereas Synology Video Station is an application that is included with your NAS on Day 1 at no additional cost. All that said, neither service can technically be called free, as both still require you to purchase a Synology NAS. Additionally, it is still worth highlighting that some more recent Innovations in Plex online services and utilisation of hardware transcoding (the ability to use the CPU’s embedded graphics or an available graphics card to adapt files on the fly to make them better suited to a client) is not available on the free tier of Plex, but ARE available by default in the Synology Video Station application. You can still utilise software transcoding on Plex for free and this will deal with a large degree of transcoding requirements, but the fact that you have to pay extra within the Plex app to utilise the hardware already available on your NAS is something a number of users find difficult to accept. Throughout this article, any feature that is only available as a paid Plex Pass feature will be highlighted as such.

Plex VS Synology Video Station – Installation and First Time Setup

Installation of either the Synology Video Station or Plex Media Server application is near enough identical. Both are readily available in the Synology app centre and can be installed within two clicks. Both media server applications do not require your multimedia files to be stored in a pre-designated/directory location and the sources for TV shows, Movies and more can be scanned and indexed by each media server application after they are installed. In fact, the initial installation on both is incredibly straightforward and there is really only one main difference between them. That difference is that whereas the Synology Media application uses your original NAS login credentials, Plex will require you to set up an account with them online in order to use the software, even if you only intend to use your Plex Media Server on the local network/DLNA. As Plex is a third-party application, this is a little understandable if a tiny bit annoying for some. 

It is also worth highlighting that both media server applications will receive regular updates during their lifespan and this is treated slightly differently too. As Synology Video Station is a first-party app, as soon as an update is available, you will be notified immediately in the app centre and even have the opportunity to apply these firmware updates automatically. Plex updates on the other hand will almost always need to be installed manually, as the available default Plex application on the Synology app centre is updated considerably less frequently and as soon as you setup Plex for the first time, it will ALWAYS inform you that there is a new update available straight away. The Plex Media Server application itself will tell you when an update is available regularly at the top right and in the settings menu, but requires you to download the latest Plex server update to a connected computer and then you need to upload this update directly to the Synology NAS app centre manually. It is only a small inconvenience really, but does mean that regular updates on your media server of choice are handled more easily and with likely more frequency on Synology Video Station rather than Plex.

Plex VS Synology Video Station – GUI, Media Support and Browsing

The user interface of Synology Video Station and Plex Media Server are quite similar when viewed on a client device, such as a console, TV and Amazon Fire TV stick. With all of your available Movies and Boxsets clearly shown and the metadata collected by each media server application creating a great user interface for your connected users. 

However the back end/server view of each media server application is considerably different and where the Synology Video Station application is designed exclusively around video media options and configuration (as Synology have a wide range of applications for different Media types and general NAS server maintenance already available), Plex, on the other hand, is a far better equipped tool for a complete server, with the bulk of server maintenance and customisation options built into the single Plex GUI. If you are something of an IT novice, the wide range of options that Plex Media Server throws at you for system maintenance can be a touch intimidating and because Plex is designed around many different kinds of media support (something we will touch on later) it’s configuration needs to be noticeably broader than the video-centric options in the Synology official video application. These additional options, if you take the time to go through them, will definitely lead to a better media server user experience and a far better multimedia streaming system overall, it’s just a question of how bespoke and how elaborate you want your media server to be.

As mentioned, there is a clear difference in the multimedia types supported in Plex Media Server or Synology Video Station. In terms of handling of video Media, they are near enough identical with some exceptions with regard to specialist audio handling for certain dense Media. However, much like the back-end server control mentioned earlier, Synology Video Station only handles video media and relies on alternative applications such as Synology moments, photo station, Synology photos, audio station and download station to play and obtain other kinds of multimedia. Plex Media Server is a much more diverse multimedia tool with support of your photo collections (AI-assisted too), album collections, podcast streaming and several online video streaming services included. In both cases, it makes a lot of sense why they are designed this way, but some users may prefer their media server to be more of a Swiss army knife and others may want their video streaming, music streaming and photo streaming to be different services for different devices and clients. Neither Plex or Synology Video Station really gain any advantage here but simply show how they are different in their architecture. If you want simplicity in the user interface, go with Synology Video Station. If you want simplicity in your media server as a whole, go with Plex Media Server.

Plex VS Synology Video Station – Meta Data Scraping

The scraping of metadata in a media server is precisely what separates a bog-standard selection of files and folders on your screen from a slick graphical user interface that is engaging, informative and a joy to use. When we talk about metadata, we are talking about thumbnails, box art, media descriptions, cast listings, review scores, trailers and more. When we say scraping, that is the process of the software accessing numerous online databases to retrieve and store this information locally to the NAS. The result is your years of TV and movie collection being transformed into something near identical to Netflix and Amazon Prime video in presentation. Metadata ultimately benefits connected users and their client hardware devices, with both Plex and Video Station being very similar in how they look to a client device, albeit with a few branded differences in colour and config.

However, on the server-side, both Synology Video Station and Plex have gone a different way with metadata scraping at a setup level. Of the two, Synology Video Station is definitely the less option-heavy and although this is thanks in many ways to a lot of key options being found in the general server GUI outside of the app, it is still pretty thin on the ground for configuration of your video media server. This is not an enormous surprise given how Synology have generally erred towards keeping things as user-friendly as possible and this is often done by simplifying configurations and sitting numerous settings to system default. The options for scraping metadata on the Synology are surprisingly thin on the ground and some more advanced options require you to sign up to some resource database websites to obtain a two-way key. Despite this, Synology still manages to scrape a tremendous amount of metadata without this key and resource linking. Indeed, although the number of supported databases for metadata listed on the Synology Video Station app is few and far between, it was still able to find the same level of metadata found on the Plex Media Server application and displayed all of the test media perfectly. 

Plex Media Server has access to significantly more online databases and although the system will generally ask you to select which one individually you wish to scrape for metadata in each library, it does do it with a high degree of accuracy. It also manages to scrape this metadata for more than just your Movies and applies this also to your music collection and podcast collection too within the app. Metadata scraping via Plex Media Server also does not require any kind of log-in to these individual databases and is largely automated off the bat, with users being able to switch designated databases for each Media type and folder on the fly. Of course, this all doesn’t guarantee accuracy and will still always be based on the format and layout of your Media in many cases (tv shows listed as S01E01 for season 1, episode 1, etc), but nevertheless, it has to be said that with more available resources and less configuration required for each of them, that Plex Media Server has the broader and more likely to succeed position on metadata scraping.

Plex VS Synology Video Station – Playback and Transcoding

This is one of the most important parts of any media server in the grand scheme of things – multimedia playback and transcoding. This is typically the action of changing a media file into a version that is more acceptable to the client device that you are enjoying it on (TV, Phone, Console, etc). This extends to but is not limited to, changing the resolution, changing the bitrate, changing the file format and ultimately compressing a file into a smaller version in most cases. Because Plex and Synology Video Station are available on the same NAS system, it means that media variations with regard to codecs, compressions and file types will be equally supported at the default level. If a file can be played back in its original version on Plex, it can be played back on Synology Video Station. However, it is when these files need to be adapted with transcoding that we see clear distinctions between each of them. Transcoding is something that remote accessing client users will likely use without even realising it, as they might well be on a limited data connection (speed or coverage at the time) or using a smaller device (such as a phone) to playback a monster 4K 60FPS movie that is overkill on that hardware. So, transcoding is at its best when you do not notice it is being done OR it is adaptable in as many ways as possible to cover all your likely scenarios.

When the NAS needs to perform a transcode on a file on the fly (eg, so you need to convert a video file into a better-suited version for the client watching device upon request and without delay) it will typically do it with software transcoding or hardware transcoding. Software transcoding is when the system uses the raw resources of the CPU and memory inside the NAS to convert the file. Hardware transcoding is when the NAS system features a graphical component (such as embedded graphics featured on a CPU) or an available graphics card that is installed – as these are designed for handling video files and/or graphical manipulation tasks, and will therefore utilise considerably fewer resources. Plex Media Server only provides hardware transcoding in the paid subscription service Plex Pass and then needs to be enabled in the encoding section by selecting the option ‘make my CPU hurt’. Software transcoding is available for the free version of Plex Media Server but is far less efficient and will result in much higher-end Media in 4K and 1080p playback consuming the majority of hardware resources to transcode or will simply not play at all. 

Synology Video Station on the other hand, because it is a native first-party app, has full access to the hardware transcoding element of the NAS and therefore allows users to take advantage of it easily and immediately, and at no additional cost. This has been one of the driving forces behind the popularity of Synology Video Station application, as although the majority of NAS brands have their own video player, Synology is the only one that manages to merge the slick meta-data supported graphical user interface found in Plex but still manages to provide the free and unlimited limited access to the hardware resources you would expect after spending several $100s on a NAS. That said, the way that Synology handles the subject of transcoding in its user interface is a little peculiar, especially for users who are trying to balance the best possible playback vs the most appropriate transcoding level on the fly/manually. 

When you wish for the NAS system to transcode a file in the Video Station user interface, you are presented with the options for adjusting the picture quality to high, medium, low, very low, etc. This is exactly what one might expect from a brand that wants to consistently keep things as simple as possible, however, for those who want to select a specific quality level to playback the file or want a better idea of the best quality level in future should be for other files, this will be extraordinarily limiting. Plex Media Server on the other hand allows you to switch between an automatic transcode option that changes the file to the recommended quality level for the client and connection, or you can specifically switch one of numerous video quality levels that break down into both resolution and bitrate in several places. Overall, the ability for Video Station to be able to take advantage of hardware transcoding at no additional cost and with little or no intervention from the end-user is still ultimately the best thing here. I just wish they gave uses a better degree of control and choice as found in Plex Media Server.

Plex VS Synology Video Station – Client Support

Having a slick and well-performing media server is always good, but if you cannot watch the media inside it on the devices you regularly use, then it’s all a bit pointless. Most people are already well aware that the multimedia collections they have on a NAS can easily be streamed over the local area network via popular methods such as DLNA and UPnP (digital living network alliance and universal plug and play). However, they are much more file and folder, breadcrumb level streaming and in order to enjoy the pretty GUI of Plex and Synology Video Station, an official client app needs to be available on the respective app centre or made unofficially and manually installed. This is an area where Plex Media Server almost completely wins over Synology Video Station, as it simply cannot compete with the variety and accessibility of the Plex client availability in popular app centres. 

Full credit to Plex, they have really taken the time to make sure their platform is available on pretty much any modern device, in what multiple client or media server application forms. They also take the time after an official update of services and then push these updates across each available downloadable client. This is largely impossible for Synology to compete with and they instead opt for a much more targeted client support regime, supporting all modern mobile phone OS’, desktop operating systems and some of the major sofa accessible app centres on TVs and streamers like Amazon fire TV. In  8 out of 10 cases, your device will support both Plex and Synology Video Station, but this is by no means total and sometimes a hardware client (such as an off-brand Android phone, tablet or media box) that you hope to support Video Station will sadly not. 

It is once again worth mentioning that Synology separates different multimedia types towards their own individual client apps, for example, DS Audio or Audio Station for music and DS Photo for photography. Indeed, some of these apps are quite advanced with practically unique connectivity to the likes of Amazon Alexa (something currently impossible on any other NAS platform without a 3rd party application like ‘my-media’ Alexa skill. But this, unfortunately, does not make up for being truly overshadowed by the wider degree of support available on Plex across numerous clients and smart Home devices – though the latter does require a Plex Pass. For sheer volume of connectivity on the clients, Plex wins by an absolute landslide.

Plex VS Synology Video Station – Conclusion

Throughout this comparison of Plex Media Server and Synology Video Station, it has become abundantly clear that one tool is designed around being a Swiss army knife of features and functions, whilst the other performs a smaller but key range of services exceptionally well. Those who have been using Plex Media Server for a number of years are highly unlikely to make the jump to Synology Video Station, as it may feel less feature-rich and perhaps a tad bare-bones. However, those users who are new to the idea of private NAS based multimedia streaming would do very well to try out Synology Video Station first, as I genuinely believe when it comes to concentrating on video streaming services, it is genuinely one of the best platforms out there – albeit clearly restricted to just Synology NAS devices. Plex Media Server attempts to do many things in its pursuit of being the go-to media server of choice for those jumping ship from Netflix and succeeds in most cases, it is just worth remembering that in recent years the platform has perhaps tried to diversify a tad too much. 

PLEX MEDIA SERVER

Synology Video Station

Best for Mixed Media

Best for Ease of Access on Client Hardware

Best for Transcoding Control

Best for Add On Services

Best for Metadata Sources

Best for Price

Best Performance for Transcoding

Best for Ease of Use

Best for Ease Setup

Best for Updates & Firmware Revs

Thanks for reading and I hope this guide helps you choose the perfect multimedia server for streaming with your friends, family and colleagues. If you are still lost on the right NAS, multimedia software or ideal backup system for your needs, then take advantage of the free advice section below. This is a completely free and unbias service to help work out their ideal data storage solution for you. It is manned by my myself and EddieTheWebGuy, so although replies may take an extra day or so, we will answer your email and have your best interests in mind! Have a great week.

If you are thinking of buying a NAS for Multimedia, Please use the links below:

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Synology BeeStation Hard Drive Upgrade – A Step By Step Guide

Par : Rob Andrews
8 mars 2024 à 15:00

How to Upgrade the Hard Drive in Your BeeStation

Why Would You want to change the hard drive in the Synology Beestation? Whether you are an existing owner of the Synology Beestation or a potential NAS buyer who is considering moving away from public cloud services onto your own personal cloud, the Beestastion and BSM provide a fantastically user-friendly alternative to the Synology Diskstation and DSM solutions that the brand has been releasing for almost 25 years. The Beestation can be set up in minutes, sets up all the apps, storage and services in 3 clicks and is BY FAR the most user-friendly NAS system I have ever used! However, it DOES have 1 weakness… one rather sizable Achilles heel… THAT 4TB hard drive inside! The Synology Beestation (At launch – so that might change as time goes on) arrives with a single 4TB Synology HAT3300/3310 5400RPM Hard Drive for storing all your data. This can lead to a lower glass ceiling when it comes to your long-term storage – fun fact, The latest iPhone Pro models supports upto 48MP Apple ProRAW images, which captures more dynamic range at the cost of much larger files, around 75MB for each image. That would still allow just under 60,000 images on a 4TB drives – but once you factor in video backups, PC backups and more, 4TB of capacity is actually going to run out quicker than you think, especially if you connect the maximum 8 supported users. Then there is the performance barrier of a single 5400RPM HDD. Hardware are not great for larger simultaneous input/outputs (e.g lots of individual write operation tasks happening at the same time) and the response times and smoothness of the BSM/BeeStation experience will be diminished. You are also losing out on RAID failover, something that is largely unavailable in a 1 bay, but short of using a dual drive cage adapter (more on that later on) this is unavoidable.

This brings us neatly back around to the subject of changing the HDD inside the Synology Beestation to something with a higher capacity, maybe a Pro series drive with 7200RPM and more cache. or perhaps even a faster SSD instead of an HDD? Synology has not allowed this system to support hot swapping or easy accessibility to the drive media (understandable, as a 1 Bay system). Synology have released this device as an entry-level product that is not designed for more specialized use, so providing the means to upgrade the media and migrate system processes over to a new drive is NOT a straightforward process. Additionally, we should also take some time to discuss the risks and Synology’s position on this.

IMPORTANT WARNING!

This is a really, really important point. Taking apart the Synology BeeStation runs a significant risk of not only damaging your data but also completely nullifying any hardware or software support that Synology will provide you. The BeeStation was designed to be a closed system and not targeted towards higher-end tech enthusiasts, and therefore does not allow the same easy dismantle procedure that you find in the DiskStation range. This Synology BeeStation was provided to me by Synology UK, and I am dismantling the system without their assurance or without their authorization to do so; the same needs to be applied to your own BeeStation system if you intend to follow the steps in this guide to tear down and dismantle it. This system was not designed to be taken apart, and taking it apart may result in the following:

  • You might cause damage to the hard drive inside via static electricity, motion, or physical pressure
  • The Beestation uses a passive cooling system and strategic heatsinks around the internal components, allowing the system to be low noise thanks to a lack of active cooling fan. But changing the storage media inside might compromise this passive cooling system and therefore lead to unpredictable internal system temps or a detrimental effect of the system as a whole.
  • The BeeStation casing is an exceptionally tight-fitting enclosure, and dismantling it will almost certainly leave marks and clear indications that you have done so, which will invalidate any hardware support available to you as you have tampered with the system and performed actions that are not covered by the hardware warranty.
  • You run the risk of scratching the internal motherboard, PCB, or delicate components during the dismantling of the BeeStation, which will result in complete system failure at worst and detrimental performance drops at best if this occurs.

Do not proceed with dismantling your Synology BeeStation unless you are happy to run the risk that it may be deemed inoperable or that your support by Synology may cease as a result.

Additionally, the Synology BeeStation includes numerous measures to back up the content of the system’s data and set up to the Synology C2 cloud, a connected USB drive, or at an object file/folder level to third-party cloud services. It is extremely recommended that you have an up-to-the-second backup in place before you attempt any of the steps in this guide. Any data loss resulting from following the steps in this guide is purely at your own discretion, and myself and NAS Compares cannot be held accountable. Bottom line, be aware that what you are doing right now is outside of what this system was supposed to do, and that you are doing so at your own risk. Understand? Good. Let’s get on with dismantling the BeeStation and tear down this cost-effective NAS.

Also, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you read through the steps completely first, before you begin dismantling your BeeStation NAS, as it’s decent bits more layered in the access compared with a normal Diskstation NAS system.

What Do You Need for this Guide

There are actually not too many things needed for upgrading your Synology BeeStation Drive. I recommend the following:

  • A Synology BeeStation (duh?)
  • A SATA HDD (or SATA 2.5″ SSD with 3.5″ physical Adapter – EXAMPLE)
  • A crosshead Phillip screw driver – the longer the better!
  • The Synology Assistant Client Tool for Windows, Mac or Linux (installed on a system that is on the same local area network as the Beestation) – HERE
  • A downloaded copy of the latest Synology BSM Software .pat file – Download it HERE

The Firmware is optional, as it depends on the upgrade path you choose, but it doesn’t hurt to have it downloaded and ready.

BACKUP YOUR DATA FIRST – How To Backup Your Beestation Personal Cloud NAS

It is INCREDIBLY important that you backup any important data that is already on your Synology Beestation, as the process of installing a new HDD or SSD into the system will result in it replacing the original 4TB HDD. Luckily, there are a couple of great options for backing up your data for restoration when your new HDD/SSD is up and running. The most extensive (and large) one that will ultimately save you time later re-creating shares and folder structure is using the system backup in the System Configuration menu. This allows you to create a full system backup to either the Synology C2 Cloud (subscription cloud service, but does include a trial period) or to a connected USB drive. Later in the guide, I will explain how to restore a full USB backup.

Alternatively, if you are not especially fussed about the system configuration and want a more file/folder-specific backup that only backs up the core/important data (ie you don’t have/want a 4TB backup, but just want some select files/folders), you can use the USB Backup or Cloud Backup options in Beefiles. These are chiefly designed to backup an area of storage from a 3rd Party Cloud (Google Drive, Dropbox or OneDrive) or USB with a specific BeeFiles Folder (you can create multiple). This also has the feature of ensuring the data is 2 way synchronized, which means you CAN use this to copy data form the NAS to the Cloud/USB automatically.

Personally, I would recommend using the System level backup if you can ensure you have a large enough C2 Storage/USB. But also, you should have at least TWO copies of your data, as the system level backup will be in a Synology BSM/Beestation format and will only work in another Beestation system – it won’t be visible via a traditional DAS/Direct connect method.

The last thing to discuss before we begin the Hardware portion of this guide is how you wish to disconnect from the BeeStation system. Installing a new HDD/SSD will also require the system to be formatted. This will happen during the re-initialization when you install a new drive, so you have two options before this. The first is to unlink the Beestation from your Synology Account (as the system is connected via a serial number to your synology account). You will then reconnect with it later on during re-initialization. The main benefit of this method is that Unlinking with the system will KEEP your data on the 4TB hard drive inside – which means if you need to reverse all this (or even just want the old data as a OS-level backup of sorts), this process will be easier and ensure your data is still in place.

Alternatively, you can opt to just fully factory reset the whole device, which will not only disconnect your Synology Account but also delete all the data from the 4TB Hard Drive. After you have chosen the option that suits your needs. Safely power down the device via the GUI or after the system restore. Then you need to leave the system alone for a few minutes (to allow the 4TB HDD to spin down) and then disconnect all USB, Ethernet and power cables.

How To Upgrade Your Beestation HDD – The Start

First thing you need to do is disconnect all ethernet (LAN), power cables and USB devices and give the system sufficient time to allow the HDD inside to spin down. Then carefully turn the device up and have the base vent panel face up. Again, be CAREFUL as this system features a mechanical HDD inside and that can be susceptible to shock/motion damage.

Next you need to slowly and carefully peel back the rubber foot panel located at the base, at the front of the Beestation (i.e the single LED light side). It is held in place with strong adhesive, but you can replace it back after opening the case up later, as the rubber foot sits in a grooved panel and the adhesive has plenty of reuse!

Under the rubber panel are two Phillips/cross-head screws. There are the ONLY external means to open up the enclosure/casing of the BeeStation.

Remove each of these screws (keep them to one side and make sure to remember they are the base screws, as the system has 2 kinds of screws in it’s construction and mixing them up with rip the screw holes to pieces!

Removing these two screws will allow you to apply a small above of pressure to leverage the front panel of the BeeStation NAS to be removed. Important – do this carefully (that word again!) as the entire casing is made up of 2 pieces and it’s super easy to crack it in two!

The top part of the front panel is actually an L-shaped panel that has the fully ventilated dust panel attached. Mkae sure that your ease the panel off carefully enough not to break those 4 hooks at the top, as these are what align the top panel with the rest of the casing.

Slight side note, but for those that care about dust build up on 24×7 systems like the BeeStation, this can be quite useful to perform cleaning. Anyway, carrying on!

Next up os removing the Hard Drive that the Beestation Personal Cloud arrives with. The first thing you need to remove is the 2 smaller screws located around the edge of the casing. DO NOT REMOVE THE 2 LARGER SCREWS IN THE MIDDLE!!! These larger screws hold the HDD in place and you need to do this much later, or else risk the drive moving around during the dismantling.

Each screw will be easy to remove, however there are actually 3 more screw located around the base of the framework. They are tricky to reach, and a longer screwdriver would be recommended, but it can be done with an ordinary 15cm + screwdriver will get the job done.

At the front base area, you can find two black Phillips/cross-head screws that you need to remove. You will need to come at there from a slight angle if you only have a short screwdriver. Important – DO NOT USE AN ELECTRIC/AUTOMATIC SCREWDRIVER!!! Notwithstanding that you will tear the soft screw to pieces, you might cause vibration that will be damaging to the HDD next to the screw! Do it the OLD SKOOL way!

The last screw is much harder to spot and reach, it is located at the bottom-back of the enclosure, on the NON-Motherboard side. You will need to come at it from a slight angle, even with a longer screwdriver. Note, you COULD have removed the top panel attached to the HDD in order to get to the screw a little easier, but I personally would rather the HDD remains in an immobile cage throughout this part of the Beestaion teardown. It’s your call!

That is the last screw that you need to remove and , once it is done, you can begin the removal of the HDD clip/cage.

The HDD Clip/cage will slide out sideways (with a little resistance). BE CAREFUL with the removal of the HDD cage/clips, as the right-hand side will have the controller board (which has the heatsink on top of the CPU, and a bare PCB – which can be super susceptible to static and moisture!

One you have removed the HDD Cage tray, you will now have three components on the table:

Next, removing the Hard Drive from its plastic handles. The HDD is held in place by 4 screws that go directly into the same four screw holes that are usually used by HDD bays on Diskstastion NAS that utilize trays. Ther are four screw in each corner. Important note for later – Make a note of the clips and direction that are on either side of the HDD – whether you want to reassemble this Beestation to the factory build OR you are considering exploring larger HDDs, getting these clips the wrong way around or in the wrong direction will, at best, mean it won’t for back together and you need to redo them, or at WORST, you end up damaging the controller board and casing as you attempt to re-insert the drive.

Each screw uses a counter-sunk system and also arrives with a rubber washer between the screw head and the plastic. This means that you do not need to fully remove the screw, as there is a small % of space left. Regardless, just remove the four screws and each of the side panels should come off very easily.

Once again, make sure you keep track of which panel goes with each side of the HDD – As this will be a right pain during reassembly. An important area of note here is that IF you are considering adding larger/alternative drives to the Beestation and you have your heart set on an SSD, you are going to need a 2.5″ to 3.5″ HDD adapter, as the screw holes that the tray clips AND the PCB Backboard are not available on a 2.5″ SSD. This does also open the door to the potential for a Dual 2.5″ SATA SSD to 3.5″ SATA Adapter case, which would provide the performance benefits of 2x SATA SSD in a RAID 0, or the redundancy benefits of 2x SATA SSDs in a RAID 1, if the case supports internal RAID 0/1). Here are two options:

2.5″ to 3.5″ SATA Adapter ($7.99+)

Find on Amazon HERE

SYNOLOGY ASSISTANT NOT CONFIGURED PICTURE

Find on Amazon HERE

However, there is considerably more to adding a new hard drive to the BeeStation than just the physical injection!

The one we want to focus on is the HDD tray/cage. Carefully turn it around and lay the drive facedown on the table.

Once the drive is ‘face down’, you need to carefully (yes, THAT word again! Take a drink) remove the two silver screws, Try to touch the blue PCB controller board as little as possible.

Once you have removed those two screws, you need to either slide the controller board away from the Hard drive, or slide the hard drive away. You are doing this to disconnect the SATA connector that is soldered to the controller board. Do NOT leverage the hard drive upwards/downwards, as you run the risk of breaking the connector.

The controller PCB should come away very easily and with little resistance. But before we move forward, it’s worth checking the SATA connector is unharmed.

Place the controller PCB delicately to one side and then get your new storage media drive (your new HDD or SSD) unpacked and ready

Slot the new SATA drive into the PCB via the SATA slot.

Then flip the drive and board over, then screw in the two silver screws to attached the PCB to the HDD. Next, reattached the two tray clips to either side of the new HDD – gain, make sure you select the correct clips for either side and in the correct direction.

Then slot the drive cage back into the base Beestastion black plastic casing. It will be a very specific alignment and you will know it is correct, as the back ports will be completely flush with the rear port cavities on the casing

Screw the 3 base screws in place once again. plus then re-screw the two top placement screws

Then slide back into place the L-shaped top panel. Ensure the 4 hooks at the top slide in neatly and the LED cover at the front/base will meet flush with the other plastic panel.

Re-screw the two silver screws that hold the L-shaped panel in place and then re-attached the rubber foot panel.

Reconnect the local area network/internet connection, as well as the USB drive (if you have a USB backup) and finally the power cable. Then press the power button and now move over to your network connection PC/Mac/Linux desktop and we can start the reinitialization.

Re-Installing BSM on your BeeStation

When the device begins booting, after a few minutes you will hear the system beep. However, instead of heading to the usual Synology Bee Portal site page, you need to open up the Synology Assistant tool. It will scan the local area network and it will find the Synology BeeStation, but it will say that it is in the process of ‘Upgrading’

Now the amount of time this takes will depend on a lot of factors (drive size, download speed if the system is collecting the BSM software online. After some time has passed (10-20 mins tops), the system will reboot ( you will hear the drive spin down and the light on the system will change from a flashing orange light to a slow white light.

1 – UPGRADING

2 – REINITIALIZING

After a few minutes, the synology assistant should now show the message ‘Starting Services’. Don’t forget to click the ‘search’ button at the top left to rescan to see any new changes to the system status.

After a period of time, the system will now show a new message that indicates that the system needs configuration in the synology assistant:

Now you just need to double-click the Beestation listing on the Synology Assistant tool, and it will open up a new tab on your web browser that will guide you through the original BSM installation process, via the Synology Beestation Portal web site:

When you have logged into your Synology Account and have gone through the first 4 steps of the installation, you will be asked if the system is showing an orange light. If it does not, you will need to follow to on-screen restart prompts using the reset button, which will all the system to reboot into ‘find’ mode. Once you have the On-screen serial number prompt and the light on the BeeStation is Solid orange (not flashing) you can go through the usual system setup prompts and connect the BeeStation with your Synology account as normal and log in as you would have before.

What if my Synology BeeStation does not boot into the usual installer?

There IS a chance that your BeeStation will instead display a message saying ‘Not Configured’ upon the first power on after installing your new drive, typically caused by a lack of facility to download the latest firmware (i.e the network connection is not present or restricted on your network). This will result in the system booting into a similar system setup window as found on the Synology Diskstation/DSM devices.

If this occurs, double-click the BeeStation listing on the Synology Assistant tool, and it will open a new tab on your web browser that shows the manual installation steps for BSM on your BeeStation system via the LAN. Just follow the steps on the screen to select the downloaded BSM image you have on your PC/Mac machine, as well as begin the installation to the new HDD/SSD – This will wipe the contents of the drive, but that is normal and you should be using a new/blank drive anyway.

This will install the latest BSM software and the system will restart after 10 mins and you can follow the steps outlined in the previous section to setup the Beestation with your new HDD/SSD for the first time.

How to Restore Your Data to the Upgraded Drive BeeStation?

Now that your BeeStation is up and running, with your new HDD/SSD, you might have a backup of your data on USB or on the Cloud that you want to restore. If you want to use the BeeFiles Backup services for USB/Cloud, you can do this easily with the options in the BeeFiles tool and your cloud sync or USB that you created earlier can be re-connected and the data will be sent back to the Beestation. However, if you have opted to do the system-wide backup in the System settings menu, you will need to head in the system config page and select the Restore Tab on the left hand side of the page:

Next, select the Restore option, ensuring that you either have the USB Backup drive you used connected to the BeeStation system, or you have established a connection with your appropriate Synology C2 account.

Next, you need to go through the list of Backup Images (if you have multiple) and select the appropriate system backup image you want Then you need to select the backup and proceed with restoring this system image

It is worth noting that this process can take a great deal of time (depending on the size of the backup, whether it is cloud/local based and the filled % of the capacity that back was of the original 4TB drive. In my tests, it took 35 mins to restore the system that had 300-400GB of data – it is a slow by methodical process.

Once that is done, the system will reboot and when it has finished, you will need to re-enter and connect your Synology Account. After you log back into the system, you can go into the system setting and BeeFiles again, and you will see that not only is all the data restored, but also that the Synology BSM software has resized the partition to ensure that you are not losing any of the extra space that is available on your new possibly larger HDD (i.e it does not reinstall the 4TB system image, then ignore the extra HDD space – it expands the volume to the full available space of the drive)

And there you go! You have now installed a new HDD or SSD in your Synology BeeStation. REMEMBER, this is NOT authorized by Synology as use for the BeeStation system and will result in the brand not supporting you in the event of issues encountered as a result of installing non-recommended configurations such as this. The Beestation is a simplified cloud alternative to Synology DSM systems. If you want to experiment with more complex configurations, larger storage and faster systems, you should look at the Synology Rackstation and Diskstation systems.


I hope you enjoyed this guide and found in useful/informative! REMEMBER, I did this to show you what the inside of your BeeStation Personal Cloud looks like, so YOU DON’T HAVE TO! If you have any further questions, you can reach out to me on robbie ( at ) nascompares.com, or use our free advice section located on the right hand side of the page. Alternatively, you can reach us on our Discord HERE, our community forum HERE, or for faster and more personal support over on KoFi Commissions HERE. If you use and/or share the content of this guide online, please help us spread awareness of our platform and the work we do by backlinking us appropriately! Thanks for reading!


Synology BeeStation Personal Cloud Review – Quick Conclusion

READ THE FULL BeeStation Review HERE

Synology has clearly done their homework on the development and presentation of the BeeStation private cloud. They are targeting a whole new audience with this system, and therefore, criticisms based on experiences with their other hardware are likely to fall on deaf ears. The BeeStation is probably one of the best middle grounds I have ever seen between an easy-to-use and exceptionally easy-to-set-up private cloud system, while still managing to provide smooth and seamless features for accessing and sharing your private cloud’s storage securely. Looking at this system with a more network-savvy microscope kind of defeats the point, and I’ve tried to be fair in my assessment. The lack of LAN access by default seems a little odd, and launching the BeeStation series in this single-bay, 4TB-only fashion may be a bit of a marketing misstep, but overall, what you’re seeing here is an effectively priced and scaled private cloud system. It’s a fantastic alternative to third-party clouds and existing simplified NAS systems. With many users keeping an eye on their budgets and tightening costs, Synology, known for its premium position in the market, had a challenge scaling down to this kind of user. However, I have to applaud Synology’s R&D for creating a simple and easy-to-use personal cloud solution that still carries a lot of their charm and great software reputation. It may not be as feature-rich as DSM, but BSM does exactly what it says it will do, and I think the target audience it’s designed for will enjoy the BeeStation a great deal!

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 7/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.4
PROS
👍🏻User-friendly setup, ideal for beginners or those seeking a simple cloud solution.
👍🏻Secure data handling with encrypted data transmission.
👍🏻Comes with 4TB of storage included, offering good value.
👍🏻Compact and lightweight design, enhancing portability.
👍🏻Quiet operation, suitable for home or office environments.
👍🏻Integrates seamlessly with popular cloud services like Google Drive and OneDrive.
👍🏻Affordable pricing at $199, a cost-effective alternative to third-party cloud services.
👍🏻Supports remote access, allowing data management from anywhere and across client devices/OS
👍🏻Synologys reputation for quality and reliability is still clear on this smaller scale.
👍🏻Several client tools (BeeFiles, BeePhotos and Desktop sync tool) for Windows, Mac, iOS and Android available for tailored access
👍🏻System configuration backup option to USB/C2 (Often absent in budget cloud solutions)
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition in BeePhotos for faces, Objects and geo data scraping + Advanced filter/search
CONS
👎🏻Lacks the extensive app support and customization found in Synology\'s DSM platform.
👎🏻Only available in a single-bay, 4TB configuration at launch, limiting expandability.
👎🏻Single 5400RPM HDD running everything leads to slowdown more than you think!
👎🏻LAN access is disabled by default, which may not suit all users.
👎🏻Designed for a specific user base, may not meet the needs of more advanced users.

Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

DEAL WATCH – Is It On Offer Right Now?


These Offers are Checked Daily

 


📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Jonsbo N4 NAS Enclosure Released

Par : Rob Andrews
5 mars 2024 à 17:00

The Jonsbo N4 6/8-Bay NAS Enclosure has been Revealed

The Jonsbo N4 NAS Enclosure marks an addition to the brand’s lineup, featuring cube-shaped Micro-ATX cases designed specifically for DIY NAS server builds. These enclosures are available in two colours: black and white, each incorporating a distinctive design that includes a classy wood embellishment on the front side of the upper compartment.

UPDATE – The Jonsbo N4 NAS Case is Now Available to Buy on AliExpress HERE

UPDATE 2  – The Jonsbo N4 NAS Case REVIEW is NOW LIVEHERE on YouTube, or HERE as a written article on NASCompares

Model: N4 (Black / White)

Dimensions: 286mm (W) x 300mm (D) x 228mm (H) / Material: 0.7mm Steel + Wood, Weight: 3.75kg

Storage: 6x 3.5″ HDD slots + 2x 2.5″ SSD slots

Motherboard: ITX / Micro-ATX

Ports: 1x Type-C USB, 1x USB 3.0 Type-A

PSU: SFX (up to 125mm in length) / Maximum CPU Cooler Height: ≤70mm

PCI Expansion: x4 , Maximum Graphics Card Length: ≤230mm

Cooling: 1x 120mm fan (built-in)

Check AliExpress HERECheck Amazon HERE

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Design

The case supports a Micro-ATX motherboard tray, low-profile expansion cards, and offers compatibility for CPU coolers up to 70 mm in height. The inclusion of eight drive caddies, with six designated for 3.5-inch drives and two for 2.5-inch drives, all equipped with SATA 6 Gbps backplanes for hot-plugging, underlines its focus on storage flexibility.

One of the key features of the N4 series is its storage capacity, which includes eight drive bays in total. This comprises six 3.5-inch bays and two 2.5-inch bays, all equipped with SATA 6 Gbps backplanes for hot-plugging capabilities. This configuration allows for a versatile setup of storage drives, meeting the demands for high storage capacity in NAS applications. The design ensures that these drive bays are easily accessible and maintained, promoting a user-friendly experience for installing and upgrading storage devices.

Cooling is managed within the enclosure by a single, built-in 120mm fan located at the rear, aimed at providing sufficient airflow to maintain optimal operating temperatures for the drives and other internal components. The enclosure’s cooling system is further supported by its design, which includes a perforated front panel for the lower compartment housing the drive bays and additional perforations along the sides and top of the upper compartment. This design choice aids in effective cooling, crucial for the reliability and longevity of the NAS server built within.

Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Connections

For connectivity and external interfaces, the N4 NAS Enclosure is equipped with a type-A USB 3.2 port and a USB 3.2 type-C port, conveniently located on the classy wood embellishment at the front side of the upper compartment. This choice of materials and placement not only adds to the aesthetic appeal of the case but also ensures easy access to the ports for quick connections. The inclusion of these modern USB standards caters to the need for high-speed data transfer, a significant aspect for NAS systems that handle large volumes of data.

In terms of compatibility, the N4 series supports MicroATX and Mini-ITX motherboard form factors, with accommodation for up to four low-profile expansion slots. It allows for the installation of graphics cards up to 230 mm in length and CPU coolers up to 70 mm in height, as well as SFX power supplies with a maximum depth of 125 mm. While these specifications may limit some options for high-end components, they are adequate for building a compact and efficient NAS system.

The Jonsbo N4 NAS Enclosure provides a balanced solution for users looking to assemble a NAS server with a focus on storage capacity, cooling efficiency, and a compact footprint.

When Will the Jonsbo N4 NAS Case Be Released and the Price?

Regarding price and availability, the cost of the Jonsbo N4 NAS Enclosure is yet to be confirmed (TBC), but potential buyers can anticipate a price point similar to the previously released Jonsbo N3 model. The initial release is expected to be available through popular online platforms such as Aliexpress and Amazon, which are often the first to stock new products from Jonsbo. This approach allows for wider availability and accessibility to a global audience eagerly awaiting new NAS solutions. The full release and widespread availability of the Jonsbo N4 NAS Enclosure are projected for Spring 2024, aligning with the company’s strategy to introduce innovative products in a timely manner. As anticipation builds, NASCompares plans to conduct a thorough review of the enclosure, offering insights and evaluations to potential users. This forthcoming review will provide valuable information on the N4’s performance, build quality, and overall value, assisting in informed decision-making for those considering this enclosure for their NAS server builds.

(White) Check AliExpress $75.36

Check Amazon HERE

(Black) Check AliExpress $79.99

Check Amazon HERE

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle


Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

A UPS Buyers Guide for NAS (Synology / QNAP / Asustor / Terramaster NAS)

Par : Rob Andrews
4 mars 2024 à 18:00

An Easy Guide to Buying the Right UPS for your NAS System

The popularity of uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) has risen significantly in recent years. Not just for businesses, but for home users as well, who often have limited power setups such as houseboats, pop-up offices, and mobile homes. The value of having a safety net for your power-consuming devices is undeniable. Additionally, for those whose data is critical and whose business or personal life relies on constant access and read/write operations, a UPS can provide peace of mind. In the past, power failure solutions were only accessible to large enterprises and high-level businesses, with prices starting in the five figures. However, with the rise of network-attached storage (NAS) in homes and the increased efficiency of mass production techniques, owning a UPS device to protect data in both homes and businesses has become more affordable. However, choosing the right UPS for your NAS device, such as a QNAP or Synology, and finding one that fits within your budget can be challenging. In this guide, we will address the three commonly asked questions by users considering a UPS but unsure of which device to choose: 1) How does a UPS work and how will I benefit? 2) How do I determine the right Watts, Volts, and Amps to choose the best UPS? 3) How much will a UPS cost? We hope this guide is helpful for NAS buyers looking at brands such as Synology, QNAP, Asustor, Terramaster, and others, and also for anyone looking to choose the right UPS for other devices.

Click HERE to Skip ahead to the Recommended UPS for different NAS drives

What Are the Factors I need to consider when buying a UPS for my NAS?

Choosing the right UPS (uninterruptible power supply) for your Synology or QNAP NAS (network-attached storage) can be a complex task, as there are many factors to consider. However, by following a few key guidelines, you can ensure that your NAS is protected against power outages and other issues that could cause data loss or corruption. The first thing to consider when choosing a UPS for your NAS is the amount of power that your NAS requires. Desktop NAS devices with external PSUs typically have a power consumption of around 60-120 watts and rackmounts generally 250W and above, although this can vary depending on the specific model and the number of hard drives that are installed. It is important to choose a UPS that can provide at least this much power, as well as a bit extra to account for any other devices that may be connected to the NAS. Another important factor to consider is the runtime of the UPS. This is the amount of time that the UPS can keep your NAS running in the event of a power outage. The runtime of a UPS is typically measured in minutes, and you should choose a UPS that has a runtime that is long enough to allow you to properly shut down your NAS in the event of a power outage.

Another important feature to look for when choosing a UPS is the ability to communicate with the NAS. Some UPS’ have built-in USB or serial ports that allow them to communicate with the NAS and provide status information. This can be very useful in case of power outage, as it can allow you to monitor the status of the UPS and take appropriate action. Finally, you should also consider the size and weight of the UPS, as well as its overall design. A UPS that is smaller and lighter may be more convenient to deploy, but you should also make sure that it is well-designed and built to last. When choosing a UPS for your NAS, it is important to consider the amount of power that your NAS requires, the runtime of the UPS, the ability to communicate with the NAS, compatibility and the size and weight of the UPS. By following these guidelines, you can ensure that your NAS is protected against power outages and other issues that could cause data loss or corruption.

What is a UPS and Why Should I Buy One for my NAS?

The most frequently asked question about UPS is typically “What exactly is a UPS and what does it do?” UPS stands for Uninterruptible Power Supply and many users believe that purchasing a UPS means they can run their devices and access data from their NAS, DAS, or SAN for hours after a power failure. While this is technically true, it would require a significant financial investment in the form of a 5-figure sum. In reality, most users do not require hours of protection for their read/write data operations on HDD media. Instead, what is often needed is enough time to safely shut down the server or RAID storage. This can be achieved by spending only hundreds of pounds, not thousands, as it depends on the number of devices drawing power, their specific needs, and the efficiency of the chosen UPS. For more information on UPS and how to choose one, please watch the video below.

How Does a UPS Draw Power and How Do I Connect My Devices?

This topic can be challenging for some, so we will break it down and explain it in a simple way. Before delving into technical terms like Watts, Volts, and Power, let’s use an analogy that’s easy to understand. Imagine receiving electricity to your device as drawing water from a tap.

 

To understand this concept, we can use an analogy of a tap and water. Just like a tap needs water and pressure to deliver it through the pipe, an electrical circuit needs electrons and voltage to deliver electricity to a device. The water represents the electrons that carry electricity from the power source to the destination device, like a NAS, DAS, or PC. The tap represents the destination device and the water/electrons are going around in a circuit back to the water/power source, which is mostly unseen in the cables.

The pressure in the analogy represents the VOLTAGE, which is the strength of the electricity being pushed by the electrons in the circuit. It’s important to measure this as some devices are designed to only accept a specific amount of voltage. If the voltage is too high or too low, the device will not function correctly.

AMPS represent the amount of electrical charge that passes a given point in a second, similar to how much water passes through the pipe per second.

So, now we need to know the WATTS of the device. This is compiled with the following equation:

 

AMPS x VOLTS = WATTS

or

Water Volume x Water Pressure = Water Power

How a UPS works with your NAS smartIf you’ve ever experienced weak water pressure in a shower while living in an apartment on a higher floor, this is likely due to the water pressure not being strong enough to deliver the water to the destination device. Similarly, a smaller battery pack is often measured in milliampere-hours (mAh), which represents the amount of charge available, rather than time. Using the analogy of water, this would be like a large drum of water. The amount of water and how fast it travels from the drum is not as important as the available water that can be carried over to the tap. The output and result is heavily affected by the AMPS and VOLTS, similar to the pressure of water and the maximum or minimum amount of water the tap can receive.

Choosing the right UPS Battery for your Home or Office

The majority of UPS devices have a similar setup. You connect one end to your main power outlet (3 Pin, 2 Pin, etc) and the UPS has multiple ports for connecting your destination devices (PC, NAS, etc). Inside the UPS chassis, there is one or more batteries that are charged from the wall plug, while your devices are powered directly from the wall and not drawing from the batteries unless there is a power failure. In the event of a power failure in your home or business, the destination devices will switch to drawing power from the batteries, giving you time to save your data and shut down your devices safely, protecting your digital storage from corruption or loss. It’s worth noting that when buying a UPS, there are many figures to consider, but the power drawn by computing equipment is typically measured in Watts or Volt-Amps(VA).

How a UPS works with your NAS diagram

BUT

The power in Watts is the real power drawn by the equipment.Volt-Amps are called the “apparent power” and are the product of the voltage applied to the equipment times the current drawn by the equipment.

Inexpensive UPS devices typically have a shorter running time because they don’t provide as much charge. Mid-range UPS devices, on the other hand, offer longer charge times, more features, and additional functionality such as network alerts, internet alerts via SMS or email, an LCD display, USB connectivity for maintenance, and the ability to automatically save or shut down certain NAS or PC machines in the event of a power failure, eliminating the need for manual intervention.

There is more to choosing the right UPS than matching the WATTS of your destination device and that of the UPS

UPS capacities are giving in VOLT-AMPS , not WATTS

Remember again,

VOLTS x AMPS = WATTS

Well, Resistance present in electrical load means that the WATTS cannot be matched Like for Like. So:

How long does a UPS lastHow do I Choose the Correct VA for the Watts on my NAS, PC and more?

You will need to consider a UPS with a VOLT-AMP 50-70% higher than the WATTS present on your destination device. Don’t forget to factor into your consumption any other devices that are drawing from the UPS, as this consumption is not per device, but TOTAL.

What is Line Interaction on a UPS?

Some UPS devices have a “Line Interactive” feature that can strengthen a weak or inconsistent power supply, particularly useful for those in remote areas where maintenance may be less frequent. When it comes to sizing a UPS, it’s important to note that equipment nameplate ratings are often in VA which can make it difficult to determine the Watt rating. To avoid oversizing the UPS, it’s recommended to configure the system such that the VA rating of the load is no greater than 60% of the UPS VA rating. This will prevent exceeding the Watt rating of the UPS. However, this approach may result in an oversized UPS and a longer run time than expected.

– Battery Packs, Listed in VOLTS and can be added to an existing UPS

– Replacement Battery Cartridges, an Internal Upgrade, RANGE specific

– Available in Desktop or Rack mount

What Are the most popular brands in the UPS Market?

There are many brands that provide UPS (uninterruptible power supply) devices in the market, but some of the most popular ones include:

  1. APC (American Power Conversion) – APC is a well-known brand that has been providing UPS devices for many years. They offer a wide range of UPS devices, including standalone units, rack-mount units, and network-grade units. They also offer a variety of software and accessories to help manage and monitor their UPS devices.
  2. Tripp Lite – Tripp Lite is another well-known brand that provides UPS devices. They offer a wide range of UPS devices, including standalone units, rack-mount units, and network-grade units. They also offer a variety of software and accessories to help manage and monitor their UPS devices.
  3. Eaton – Eaton is a well-established brand that provides UPS devices. They offer a wide range of UPS devices, including standalone units, rack-mount units, and network-grade units. They also offer a variety of software and accessories to help manage and monitor their UPS devices.
  4. CyberPower – CyberPower is a brand that provides a wide range of UPS devices, including standalone units, rack-mount units, and network-grade units. They also offer a variety of software and accessories to help manage and monitor their UPS devices.
  5. Schneider Electric – Schneider Electric is a brand that provides a wide range of UPS devices, including standalone units, rack-mount units, and network-grade units. They also offer a variety of software and accessories to help manage and monitor their UPS devices.
  6. Liebert – Liebert is a brand that provides a wide range of UPS devices, including standalone units, rack-mount units, and network-grade units. They also offer a variety of software and accessories to help manage and monitor their UPS devices.

These are just a few examples of the many brands that provide UPS devices in the market. There are many other brands available, each with their own set of features, specifications, and pricing options, so it is worth researching different options to find the one that best suits your needs.

How Do Synology, QNAP, Asustor and Terramaster NAS work with a UPS?

Almost all NAS drive brands support the use of a smart UPS, connected via USB for monitoring or via the network. That said, how each NAS system reacts to a power cut and switching to the UPS battery does differ. I recently tested the CyberPower 1500 system with a selection of 4-Bay UPS systems to see how each NAS brand’s hardware and software react. Below is the video for each brand. Just click the video, or you can open them up in a separate tab by clicking the title.

Synology NAS UPS Test

 

QNAP NAS UPS Test

 

Asustor NAS UPS Test

 

Terramaster NAS UPS Test

Recommended UPS for Different NAS Drives from Synology, QNAP, Asustor or Terramaster

Below are a number of tiered UPS systems for your individual power needs and budget. These are based on the Watts you need to cover and based on a single NAS  of different size each. This, of course, is just the tip of the iceberg and for more precise advice based on a whole office or server room of hardware, we recommend getting in touch with us directly using the Free Advice section (no commitment and the advice is totally impartial) so we can save you money as well as provide you with a solution that will help you sleep at night! All solutions that I recommend below have to arrive with at least 2 Years of Manufacturers’ Warranty, 2 Years of Battery Warranty/Replacement Coverage, USB and/or Network Support, NAS compatibility, provides at least 10-20mins of continued client operation in a power-cut, support of line interaction and AT LEAST 6x mains power points for devices

Budget/Basic UPS (No Frills!) for Value and/or ARM-Based NAS

For much more modest Synology or QNAP NAS setups, as well as factoring in additional home/office equipment I would recommend the following UPS Device.

  • 1-4 HDD NAS Drive with 90-120w PSU
  • 1x Desktop PC with 250W PSU and Laptops/tablets
  • 1x Router 30W internal PSU
  • + Misc Other Office Equipment (50W avg)
  • Floor or Tower Versions
  • No LCD available

Option – The Amazon Basics UPS, Available in different versions that cover 400VA to 1500VA,  6-8 Ports – Starts at $49

Find it on Amazon HERE


 

Best UPS for a 1-2-Bay NAS Drive for Home or Home Office Use

For much more modest Synology or QNAP NAS setups, as well as factoring in additional home/office equipment I would recommend the following UPS Device.

  • 1-2 HDD NAS Drive with 60-90w PSU
  • 1x Desktop PC with 250W PSU
  • 1x Router 30W internal PSU
  • + Misc Other Office Equipment (50W avg)

Option – The APC BE600M1 , Available in different versions that cover 550VA to 850VA, 7 Ports – Starts at $99

Find it on Amazon HERE


 

Best UPS for a 1-2-Bay NAS Drive for Business

For much more modest Synology or QNAP NAS setups, as well as factoring in additional home/office equipment I would recommend the following UPS Device.

  • 1-2 HDD NAS Drive with 60-90w PSU
  • 1x Desktop PC with 250W PSU
  • 1x Router 30W internal PSU
  • + Misc Other Office Equipment (50W avg)

Option – The APC BE650G2, Available in different versions that cover 185W to 520W, 8 Ports – Starts at $169

Find it on Amazon HERE


 

Best UPS for a 4-8-Bay NAS Drive for Prosumers

For much more modest Synology or QNAP NAS setups, as well as factoring in additional home/office equipment I would recommend the following UPS Device.

  • 4-8 HDD NAS Drive with 100-250W PSU
  • 2x Desktop PC with 250W PSU
  • 1x Router 30W internal PSU + Switch with 25W PSU
  • + Misc Other Office Equipment (100W avg)
  • Battery/Coverage Insurance ($500,000 Connected Equipment Guarantee)
  • Tower Style

Option – The CyberPower CP1500PFCLCD PFC Sinewave UPS System, Available in different versions that cover 850-1500VA (1000W), 10-12 Ports – Starts at $389

Find it on Amazon HERE


 

Best UPS for an 8-12-Bay NAS Drive for Medium Large Business and Video/Photo Editors

For much more modest Synology or QNAP NAS setups, as well as factoring in additional home/office equipment I would recommend the following UPS Device.

  • 8-12 HDD NAS Drive with 250-350W PSU
  • Rackmount entry point (factor in dual/Redundant PSUs)
  • 3x Desktop PC with 250W PSU
  • 1x Router 30W internal PSU + 10GbE Switch with 90W PSU
  • + Misc Other Office Equipment (400W avg)
  • Rackmount Style (Desktop alternatives available, but cap at 2000VA)

Option – The Tripp Lite SU3000RTXL3U Sinewave UPS System, Available in different versions that cover 750-3000VA (2400W), 7-9 Ports – Starts at $799

Find it on Amazon HERE


How Long do UPS Batteries Last?

The lifespan of a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) battery can vary depending on several factors, including the type of battery, the quality of the battery, the usage, and the environment in which the UPS is used. However, on average, a UPS battery should last between 3-5 years with proper usage and maintenance. Lead-acid batteries, which are commonly used in UPS systems, have a typical lifespan of 3-5 years. However, this lifespan can be shortened or extended depending on the usage and maintenance of the battery. For example, if the battery is frequently discharged to a low level, this can shorten its lifespan, whereas proper charging and maintenance can prolong it.

It’s important to note that the lifespan of UPS batteries can also be affected by environmental factors such as temperature, humidity and the amount of use. High temperatures and humidity can shorten the battery life, while keeping the UPS in a cool and dry environment can extend it. It’s also worth noting that most of the UPS batteries have an end-of-life indicator, which will alert you when the battery is no longer performing as well as it should. This will give you an idea of when the battery needs to be replaced.

In conclusion, the lifespan of a UPS battery can vary depending on several factors, including the type of battery, the quality of the battery, the usage, and the environment in which the UPS is used. On average, a UPS battery should last between 3-5 years with proper usage and maintenance. Keeping an eye on the end-of-life indicator and maintaining the battery in a cool and dry environment can help to extend the battery’s lifespan.

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

 

CWWK AMD 7840HS CPU+Motherboard Combo Deep Dive

Par : Rob Andrews
1 mars 2024 à 15:00

CWWK AMD 7840HS NAS Motherboard – Any Good?

If you have been in the market for building your own NAS from scratch on a budget, then if you push past all the Intel Celeron, Pentium and Core CPU+Mobo combos that are flooded in the market, you might well come across this recently revealed AMD powered monster of a CPU+Motherbaord combination – The CWWK AMD-7840HS board. Arriving under several retailer brand (including Topton), this board arrives with an 8 Core CPU that can burst up to 5.1 Ghz, 2.7Ghz int. Gfx, 4x 2.5GbE, a PCIe Gen 4×8 slot, USB 4, 2x Gen 4×2 M,.2 slots an d support for up to 9 SATA drives. I mean.. WOW. The TDP is a little higher than some might like, the ECC support is up for debate (more on that later) and the 20 Lane CPU is definitely being spread out pretty wide – but there is no denying that this is a serious bot of kit. So, what exactly do you get when you pay $499+ for this SoC Mobile CPU and Motherboard combo? What’s the design like? And should you be considering this for your next TrueNAS Build? Let’s take a closer look at the AMD-7840HS NAS board.

Here are a few examples of where you can get this board online:

  • (Topton) 8-Bay / 9-Bay Board AMD-7940HS $489 (AliExpress) HERE
  • (Topton) The AMD-7940HS CPU+Board + 1TB NVMe + 32GB DDR5 + SFF Cables + CPU HS $729 (AliExpress) HERE
  • (KingNovy) Complete Board + AMD-7940HS $509 (AliExpress) HERE
  • Learn more about other Recommended M-ITX CPU+Mobo Combos HERE in an article or HERE on YouTube

Note – Performance Testing and NAS Building are still ‘WiP’ on this board as I wait for the last few components to arrive for YouTube. I will update this article with additional information resources after testing is concluded

Specification Detail
Architecture Zen 4 (Phoenix)
Cores / Threads 8 / 16
Base / Boost Frequency 3.8 GHz / 5.1 GHz
TDP (Thermal Design Power) 35 W (Configurable 35-54 W)
Memory Support DDR5, LPDDR5x up to 7500 MT/s; Dual-channel; ECC support (in specific configurations of CPU)
Integrated Graphics Radeon 780M; Graphics engine boost clock: 2700MHz
PCI-Express Gen 4, 20 Lanes (CPU only)
Cache (L1/L2/L3) 64 KB per core / 1 MB per core / 16 MB shared
Process Size 4 nm
Socket Compatibility FP8
Production Status / Release Date Active / January 2023
Part Numbers 100-000000955 (FP7r2), 100-000000964 (FP7), 100-000001129 (FP8)
Maximum Temperature (tJMax) 100°C
Features AVX, AVX2, AVX-512, ECC Memory Support, AMD-V, Precision Boost 2


CWWK AMD 7840HS Mobo Physical Design

The CWWK 7840HS CPU+Motherboard combo represents a significant leap in compact computing, catering to a wide range of users from enthusiasts to professionals requiring high-performance systems in small form factors.

This combination of AMD’s Ryzen 7 7840HS processor and a feature-rich Mini-ITX motherboard offers an intriguing blend of power, efficiency, and expansion capabilities, making it an ideal choice for various applications, including gaming, content creation, and server use.

The motherboard itself is a lovely bit of engineering, designed with a matte black PCB and a high-density, moisture-free fiber 10-layer circuit board, ensuring both aesthetic appeal and durability. This design philosophy extends to the motherboard’s support for AMD’s “Zen 4” architecture Ryzen™ 5/7/9 series processors, providing users with the ability to choose a CPU that best fits their performance needs without compromising on form factor.

One of the standout features of this motherboard is its expansion capabilities, particularly notable given its 17×17 standard Mini-ITX form factor. It includes a PCI-E x16 slot (PCle4.0 x8 signal) for graphics or network card expansions, two M.2 NVMe (PCle4.0 x2) slots for high-speed storage, and SFF-8643 sockets that support up to four SATA 3.0 connections via cable.

This level of expandability is uncommon in Mini-ITX motherboards, offering users the flexibility to build a compact yet powerful system that can handle demanding applications and storage needs.

Memory support is another area where the 7840HS CPU+Motherboard combo shines. With dual-channel SO-DIMM DDR5 slots supporting up to 5600MHz (and backward compatibility for server-grade ECC notebook memory), it allows for high-speed, reliable memory configurations up to 64GB. This capability is crucial for application ons requiring fast data access and processing, such as video editing and 3D rendering.

HOWEVER, there is definitely a debate as to whether you can actually use ECC memory! CWWK lists 4 different CPU SKUs for this mobo and only 1 of them (the 7735HS) actually supports ECC. So, in order to investigate, I installed 1x 16GB Kingston ECC SODIMM 4800Mhz module and ran some SSH commands. Sadly, it appears that the default 7840HS version of this motherboard combo does NOT support ECC (SEE VIDEO ABOVE)

The combo’s connectivity options are equally impressive, featuring four Intel i226-V 2.5G RJ45 UDE network ports, HDMI+DP+Type-C triple display outputs supporting 4K@60Hz, and multiple USB 3.2 and Type-C interfaces. Such comprehensive connectivity ensures that users can connect a wide array of peripherals, displays, and network connections, making the system versatile for different setups and applications.

The CWWK 7840HS CPU+Motherboard combo is a great example of modern computing’s direction towards more efficient, powerful, and versatile systems within increasingly compact form factors. Whether for gaming, professional work, or server applications, this combo offers a compelling option for those seeking the pinnacle of performance and flexibility in a small package.

Its combination of a high-performance processor, expansive memory and storage options, and robust connectivity makes it a standout choice for enthusiasts and professionals alike.

The CWWK 7840HS CPU+Motherboard combo features ASMedia SATA controllers, specifically the ASM1166 and ASM1164 chips, which are central to its enhanced SATA connectivity. These chips enable the motherboard to efficiently manage SATA connections, ensuring stable and rapid data transfer rates for a range of storage devices.

The inclusion of two SFF-8643 connectors, influenced by these ASMedia components, significantly boosts the motherboard’s storage expansion capabilities. These connectors allow for up to eight SATA devices to be connected through breakout cables, optimizing storage scalability within a compact form factor. However, it’s important to highlight that these connectors do not support NVMe drives, focusing instead on maximizing SATA device compatibility.

This motherboard also boasts a single standard SATA port, complementing the SFF-8643 connectors to offer comprehensive support for SATA-based storage configurations. The strategic integration of ASMedia SATA controllers underscores a commitment to providing versatile and reliable storage solutions, tailored for users prioritizing a balance of speed, capacity, and efficiency in their builds.

The AMD Ryzen 7 7840HS is a notable entry in AMD’s mobile processor lineup, launched in January 2023. Part of the Ryzen 7 series and built on the advanced Zen 4 (Phoenix) architecture, this chip is designed to deliver high performance for laptops and portable devices. With 8 cores and 16 threads thanks to AMD’s Simultaneous Multithreading (SMT), the 7840HS offers substantial multitasking capabilities. Operating at a base frequency of 3.8 GHz with the ability to boost up to 5.1 GHz, it combines speed with efficiency, all within a 35W thermal design power (TDP). This processor also supports DDR5 memory and has integrated Radeon 780M graphics, making it well-suited for both productivity tasks and gaming.

Physically, the Ryzen 7 7840HS is manufactured using TSMC’s 4 nm process technology, which houses 25,000 million transistors on a 178 mm² die. This compact yet powerful CPU is designed for AMD’s Socket FP8, underscoring its mobile-oriented design with a configurable TDP range of 35-54W. It supports a wide range of features, including ECC memory for data integrity and PCI-Express Gen 4 for high-speed component communication.  The Ryzen 7 7840HS stands out with its inclusion of the latest Ryzen AI technology, aimed at enhancing generative AI applications, and its leading-edge Radeon 780M integrated graphics. This combination not only boosts traditional computing tasks but also opens up new possibilities in AI and gaming. The processor’s architecture enables significant improvements in instructions per cycle (IPC), benefiting from larger caches and faster memory support up to LPDDR5x-7500. Its performance is competitive with top-tier processors in its category, reflecting AMD’s commitment to delivering powerful computing solutions.

The discussion around ECC (Error-Correcting Code) memory support on the CWWK 7840HS CPU+Motherboard combo reveals a nuanced landscape of compatibility and performance considerations. While the motherboard touts support for “server-grade ECC” memory, indicating an ability to correct data corruption on-the-fly and enhance system reliability, the reality of ECC support is more complex. It requires alignment across the CPU, motherboard, and the memory itself. The AMD Ryzen 7 7840HS processor, integral to this combo, along with other CPUs offered by CWWK, presents a mixed picture regarding ECC compatibility. Despite AMD’s general support for ECC across many of its CPUs, the specific models available with this motherboard, including the 7840HS, do not officially support ECC, highlighting a disconnect between processor capabilities and motherboard features. This discrepancy underscores the importance of thorough compatibility checks for users who prioritize ECC for its error-correcting capabilities, especially in environments where data integrity is paramount.4

The situation is further complicated by the motherboard’s design and the marketing of DDR5 memory with “on-die ECC,” which does not equate to traditional ECC memory’s error-correcting functionality. This type of ECC, often referred to as a marketing gimmick, fails to provide the same level of error correction and data integrity assurance as server-grade ECC memory. As enthusiasts and professionals debate the motherboard’s ECC support, it becomes evident that while the hardware may technically support ECC, the practical benefits and implementation may fall short without the full cooperation of the CPU and explicit support from the motherboard’s firmware. This scenario leaves users in a precarious position, needing to navigate between marketing claims and technical specifications to determine the true extent of ECC support and its relevance to their specific use cases.

Given the technical details and specifications of the CWWK 7840HS CPU+Motherboard combo, we can infer some positive and negative points about this hardware combination despite the inability to access the specific Reddit page for user insights.

===== Further Testing – COMING SOON =====

Check our YouTube channel for further videos on the AMD-7840HS NAS Motherboard for testing first (such as the video below):


CWWK AMD 7840HS NAS Motherboard Review Conclusion – Pros and Cons

Spec Highlights – 4x AMD MobileRyzen Options, SODIMM DDR5 Slots×2, ECC Supported, 2×M.2 2280 4×2 SSD Slots, PCIe 4×8 connector ×1 (x16 Physical), SFF-8643 x2 Connectors for SATA III, 4x 2.5GbE, USB 4 (20Gbs Limits) , Internal USB 2.0   $489 on AliExpress and Check on Amazon

The combination of the AMD “Zen 4” architecture Ryzen™ 5/7/9 series processors with a very unique motherboard offers a high-performance platform that is particularly suitable for building a low scale, but HIGH POWER Network Attached Storage (NAS) server. The Mini-ITX form factor of the motherboard, compatible with 1700 series CPU coolers, ensures that it can fit into compact NAS cases while providing adequate cooling for the powerful processors housed within. In the realm of NAS servers, storage options and connectivity are key. The motherboard’s two M.2 NVMe (PCIe 4.0 x2) slots are ideal for high-speed storage drives that can handle intense read and write operations typical in a NAS environment. The inclusion of 2 * SFF-8643 sockets, which support up to four connections each and a total of 9 SATA 3.0, is an advanced feature that provides flexibility and scalability for storage expansion. This is particularly beneficial for NAS setups where large storage pools and redundancy (such as RAID configurations) are important. Network connectivity is another critical aspect of NAS servers, and this motherboard delivers with its 4 * Intel i226-V 2.5G RJ45 UDE network ports, allowing for high-speed data transfer and network redundancy or link aggregation if required. However, the lack of 10GbE port might limit the network throughput if higher speeds are needed, in which case the PCIe Gen 5×16 slot could be employed for an additional network interface card, although this might be considered an inefficient use of this high-bandwidth expansion slot. Lastly, the wide array of USB ports, including USB3.2 Gen2 Type-C with a 20Gbps rate and additional USB3.2 and USB2.0 ports, adds to the versatility of this motherboard. The built-in set of USB3.2 pin sockets also allow for further expansion and connectivity options, essential for a NAS that may need to accommodate a variety of peripherals or provide additional data transfer interfaces.

PROS
  • High-Performance CPU: The AMD Ryzen 7 7840HS processor, with 8 cores and 16 threads capable of reaching up to 5.1GHz, offers excellent performance for demanding applications and multitasking. This makes the combo suitable for high-end gaming, content creation, and computational tasks.
  • Comprehensive Connectivity and Expansion: The motherboard’s design, featuring a PCI-E x16 slot (physically, in reality it is x8 operational), dual M.2 NVMe slots, multiple SATA3.0 connections, and 2.5G RJ45 network ports, provides a wide range of connectivity options. This allows for extensive storage solutions, high-speed internet connectivity, and the possibility of graphics or network card expansions, making it versatile for various use cases.
  • Advanced Memory Support: With dual-channel SO-DIMM DDR5 slots supporting up to 5600MHz and server-grade ECC notebook memory (still being investigated about it’s compatibility in Mobo vs CPU in the 7840HS), the combo offers cutting-edge memory technology with high-speed and reliable memory options, beneficial for workstations and servers requiring error correction for stability.
  • Efficient Power Consumption: The TDP rating of 35-54W for the CPU indicates efficient power usage, which is crucial for keeping the system cool and reducing energy costs, particularly in environments where the system might be running continuously, such as servers or media centers.
  • Compact and Durable Design: The Mini-ITX form factor is ideal for users looking to build small, space-efficient systems without compromising on performance. Additionally, the high-quality, moisture-free fiber circuit board with full protection enhances the durability and longevity of the motherboard.
CONS
  • Power Supply Requirements: The recommendation to use a power supply of more than 500W with 9 disks may necessitate a higher initial investment for users aiming to fully utilize the motherboard’s storage capabilities, especially in compact builds where space and cooling for large power supplies can be a concern.
  • Complexity for Beginners: The wealth of features and expansion options, while beneficial for experienced users, may overwhelm beginners. The technical nature of managing multiple storage devices, optimizing memory configurations, and ensuring compatibility with various components requires a certain level of expertise.
  • Limited PCI-E Bandwidth: The single PCI-E x16 slot operating at x8 signal might limit the performance of high-end graphics cards or other PCI-E devices. This could be a bottleneck for users aiming to achieve maximum graphical performance or looking to install multiple high-bandwidth PCI-E cards.
  • Cost: Given the high-end specifications and features, the CWWK 7840HS combo is likely to carry a premium price tag. This cost might be prohibitive for budget-conscious builders or those who do not require the advanced features offered by this combo.
  • Cooling Considerations: The compact Mini-ITX form factor, while advantageous for space-saving, may present challenges in terms of cooling, especially when housing high-performance components like the Ryzen 7840HS. Users will need to carefully consider cooling solutions to maintain optimal temperatures and prevent thermal throttling.

 

Here are a few examples of where you can get this board online:

  • (Topton) 8-Bay / 9-Bay Board AMD-7940HS $489 (AliExpress) HERE
  • (Topton) The AMD-7940HS CPU+Board + 1TB NVMe + 32GB DDR5 + SFF Cables + CPU HS $729 (AliExpress) HERE
  • (KingNovy) Complete Board + AMD-7940HS $509 (AliExpress) HERE
  • Learn more about other Recommended M-ITX CPU+Mobo Combos HERE in an article or HERE on YouTube
📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 

Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS – Should You Buy?

Par : Rob Andrews
28 février 2024 à 18:00

Does the Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS Deserve Your Data?

Today, we’re taking a closer look at the Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS. This review is also partnered with a YouTube video (HERE) and unlike our full review, this article is focused on helping you understand as quickly as possible whether the F4-424 Pro NAS is the right server for your needs. We have been covering the subject of Terra master NAS for several years and I think it would be fair to say that they are largely considered the ‘cost effective’ option in the NAS market. However in the last generation they made some huge changes to their systems and services. First scaling up the feature set of their TOS NAS platform (currently TOS 5.1, with TOS 6 in very early alpha) to include alot more of the popular requirements of modern Synology NAS users, including BTRFS, Flexible RAID configurations, AI powered photo tools, comprehensive backup tools, etc. Meanwhile, they continued to provide the same level of hardware as alternatives from QNAP and Asustor, such as 2.5GbE, M.2 NVMe Support, HDMI 2.0, newer CPUs, and more. Fast forward to the 2024 generation and we have their latest series, the F4-X24 series. Drawing first blood in terms of hardware over its rivals, its rocking out the gate with the Intel i3-N300 CPU 8 Core Processor and 32GB DDR5 Memory (with a more affordable Intel N95 version and less memory), they were the first to roll out a 2024 generation of devices.

Design Improvements

The Terramaster F4-424 Pro boasts significant design improvements over its predecessors. It features a more modern and streamlined chassis with better ventilation, improved drive trays, and easier access to internal components. Unlike the F4-423, which had a somewhat dated design with minimal ventilation and plastic trays, the F4-424 Pro offers a more robust build. The new design includes flush front-side ventilation, a Terramaster logo panel, and a single rear fan replacing the older model’s clunky dual fans. This redesign not only enhances aesthetics but also improves component accessibility and cooling efficiency.

The ease of accessing the NAS’s internals is a notable enhancement. With just two screws, users can remove the side panel to access the memory slot and M.2 NVMe slots. This feature contrasts sharply with the F4-423, where accessing the motherboard for upgrades was a cumbersome process. The new design clearly borrows successful elements from industry leaders like Synology and QNAP, positioning it as a competitive player in the market.

Impressive CPU and Memory

The heart of the F4-424 Pro is its Intel N300 processor, an 8-core, 8-thread CPU with a base speed of 1.8 GHz, capable of boosting up to 3.8 GHz. This processor sets a high benchmark for mid-range NAS devices, offering integrated graphics superior to many competitors. It also maintains a low 7-watt TDP, striking a balance between performance and energy efficiency.

The NAS comes equipped with 32 GB of DDR5 memory, a notable increase over many similar-priced NAS models in the market. While this exceeds the manufacturer’s stated maximum stable memory, Terramaster assures that their testing validates this configuration. This impressive combination of CPU and memory positions the F4-424 Pro as a strong contender for those seeking a mid-range NAS with high-end hardware capabilities.

Terramaster Operating System (TOS)

TOS, now in version 5.1, has evolved significantly, offering a range of fundamental and mid-level features. While it may not compete directly with the likes of Synology DSM or QNAP QTS in terms of application range, TOS focuses on getting the basics right. It includes multi-site backup options, a flexible RAID storage system, and support for both EXT4 and BTRFS file systems. Click the video below and you will be skipped ahead to the full section on TOS 5.1:

The system also boasts AI-powered photo recognition, a developing surveillance application, and multimedia streaming apps. While the lack of specific apps like a dedicated video station may be a downside for some, Terramaster compensates by providing an all-in-one mobile app and desktop interface that are user-friendly and accessible.

SSD and HDD Support

The F4-424 Pro allows for the installation of NVMe SSDs (Gen 3) in its M.2 slots, offering flexibility in utilizing these as storage pools or intelligent caching. This feature surpasses some competitors who restrict SSD usage or brand compatibility. The NAS supports a broad range of hard drives, up to 22 TB from Seagate and WD, without the restrictive compatibility issues seen in some other brands.

Plex Media Server Performance

The F4-424 Pro excels as a Plex Media Server, handling 4K media transcoding and playback with ease and even supporting early 8K performance. The NAS’s ability to handle high-resolution media without being the bottleneck in the system is a significant plus for users looking to future-proof their media streaming capabilities.

Potential to Upgrade towards TrueNAS Core, Scale and UnRAID

The F4-424 Pro currently drives with arguablely the BEST internal hardware of any 4-Bay Turnkey NAS released in the market so far. However, some users would much rather use the much longer established TrueNAS and UnRAID alternatives in the market. Whether that is because of hefty industry recommendation, or because of previous experience, some users might not want to be locked into using the software that a Turnkey NAS arrives with. So, it will definitely please some users that not only can you VERY EASILY install TrueNAS/UnRAID on the Terrmaster F4-424 Pro (or indeed any Terrmaster that features an x86 CPU). Even more, Terramaster have even made it official online that although they do not encourage users to do this, they will not deny any warranty claims from users who perform this OS change – something a few other brands have been quick to deny. Below is a walkthrough of just how easy it is to install TrueNAS CORE on a Terramaster NAS:

Note – I made a written step-by-step guide to Installing TrueNAS Core HERE. As well as another Video Guide HERE on running UnRAID on any Terramaster x86 NAS, as well as a written guide HERE

There will be users who say that it is cheaper and more flexible to build a server from scratch for TrueNAS or UnRAID, but there are also users who would much rather a ready made hardware solution that has a single warranty to follow, zero build time and already physically designed for 24×7 storage out the gate.

As good as all these sounds though, it is worth keeping in mind that the Terramaster F4-424 Pro is NOT going to be a solution that suits everyone, so let’s go through some of the reasons why you might want to give this NAS a miss.

Reasons to Maybe Skip the Terramaster F4-424 Pro

Nothing is perfect, and much like any other home server system, the F4-424 Pro is not going to be for everybody! To maintain the hardware vs value price point, some compromises were definitely made. Let’s discuss some reasons why the F4-424 Pro might not be ideal for your needs!

Lack of 10GbE Connectivity

One significant drawback is the absence of 10GbE connectivity. Despite its powerful hardware, the F4-424 Pro is limited to 2.5GbE ports. This limitation may hinder its performance in environments where higher network speeds are essential, particularly for users looking to maximize the potential of the NAS’s robust CPU.

Higher Price Point

The F4-424 Pro’s pricing, ranging from $599 to $699, positions it at a higher bracket compared to similar 4-bay NAS models. While it offers a better CPU and more memory, the price difference might not justify the incremental hardware improvements for some users, especially considering the lack of 10GbE.

Limited Range of Client Applications

Terramaster focuses more on hardware than software, resulting in a limited range of client applications for various platforms. This limitation might not suit users looking for a more tailored experience for specific services like video or photo management.

Memory Capacity Concerns

The NAS comes with 32 GB of memory, exceeding the CPU manufacturer’s recommended maximum of 16 GB. While Terramaster assures its functionality, this might raise concerns about long-term stability and performance, especially since this configuration is not standard in the industry.

Past Security Issues

Terramaster was previously impacted by the Deadbolt ransomware attack. While they have since improved security measures, it’s crucial for potential buyers to consider this history when evaluating the long-term security and reliability of the NAS.

Conclusion

The Terramaster F4-424 Pro NAS offers a compelling combination of design, performance, and features, making it an excellent choice for many users. However, its higher price, lack of 10GbE, and other considerations might make it less appealing for some.

Pros and Cons

Aspect Pros Cons
Design Modern chassis, improved ventilation Only available in 4 bay with this configuration (2 Bay used N95 CPU)
Hardware Powerful CPU, ample memory Higher price; lack of 10GbE
Software User-friendly TOS Limited client applications
Storage Versatile SSD/HDD support M.2 NVMe slots limited in speed (i.e x2 or X1)
Plex Performance Excellent for 4K and early 8K Still requires Plex Pass to use H/W transcoding
Security Improved post-Deadbolt Past ransomware impact

TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS Review – Quick Conclusion

The TerraMaster F4-424 Pro NAS is a powerful 4-bay system with an Intel i3 N300 CPU, 32GB DDR5 memory, and 2x M.2 NVMe SSD bays, offering impressive performance for tasks like Plex media streaming and transcoding. Its redesigned chassis, resembling Synology and QNAP models, improves cooling and accessibility, marking a significant design upgrade. TOS 5 software enhances GUI clarity, backup tools, storage options, and security. The absence of 10GbE and memory limitations are notable drawbacks. Nevertheless, it offers great value in the 4-bay NAS market, appealing to budget-conscious users seeking capable private server solutions.

SOFTWARE - 7/10
HARDWARE - 8/10
PERFORMANCE - 9/10
PRICE - 10/10
VALUE - 10/10


8.8
PROS
👍🏻Powerful Hardware:** Equipped with an Intel i3 N300 CPU and 32GB DDR5 memory, delivering robust performance.
👍🏻Redesigned Chassis:** Improved design for better cooling, hot-swapping, and internal accessibility.
👍🏻TOS 5 Software:** TerraMaster\'s TOS 5 software offers a clear GUI, enhanced backup tools, expanded storage options, and improved security features.
👍🏻Affordable Price:** Competitive pricing under $699 makes it an attractive option for its hardware and software capabilities.
👍🏻Flexible RAID Support:** Supports various RAID configurations, including TRAID for flexible disk array setup.
👍🏻Multiple Client Sync:** TerraSync tool efficiently synchronizes data across multiple users and devices.
👍🏻CCTV Surveillance:** Surveillance Manager offers video recording and monitoring features for added security.
👍🏻AI Photo Recognition:** Terra Photos uses AI algorithms to classify and manage photos effectively.
CONS
👎🏻No 10GbE Support:** Lacks 10GbE support, potentially limiting network speed for some users.
👎🏻Memory Over-specification:** The inclusion of 32GB memory may raise concerns, given the CPU\'s maximum support of 16GB.
👎🏻Limited Packaging Quality:** Packaging and presentation are basic and may not match the standards of competitors.


Where to Buy a Product
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤ 
amzamexmaestrovisamaster 24Hfree delreturn VISIT RETAILER ➤

 

📧 SUBSCRIBE TO OUR NEWSLETTER 🔔
[contact-form-7]
🔒 Join Inner Circle

Get an alert every time something gets added to this specific article!


Want to follow specific category? 📧 Subscribe

This description contains links to Amazon. These links will take you to some of the products mentioned in today's content. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Visit the NASCompares Deal Finder to find the best place to buy this device in your region, based on Service, Support and Reputation - Just Search for your NAS Drive in the Box Below

Need Advice on Data Storage from an Expert?

Finally, for free advice about your setup, just leave a message in the comments below here at NASCompares.com and we will get back to you. Need Help? Where possible (and where appropriate) please provide as much information about your requirements, as then I can arrange the best answer and solution to your needs. Do not worry about your e-mail address being required, it will NOT be used in a mailing list and will NOT be used in any way other than to respond to your enquiry. [contact-form-7] TRY CHAT Terms and Conditions
If you like this service, please consider supporting us. We use affiliate links on the blog allowing NAScompares information and advice service to be free of charge to you.Anything you purchase on the day you click on our links will generate a small commission which isused to run the website. Here is a link for Amazon and B&H.You can also get me a ☕ Ko-fi or old school Paypal. Thanks!To find out more about how to support this advice service check HEREIf you need to fix or configure a NAS, check Fiver Have you thought about helping others with your knowledge? Find Instructions Here  
 
Or support us by using our affiliate links on Amazon UK and Amazon US
    
 
Alternatively, why not ask me on the ASK NASCompares forum, by clicking the button below. This is a community hub that serves as a place that I can answer your question, chew the fat, share new release information and even get corrections posted. I will always get around to answering ALL queries, but as a one-man operation, I cannot promise speed! So by sharing your query in the ASK NASCompares section below, you can get a better range of solutions and suggestions, alongside my own.

☕ WE LOVE COFFEE ☕

 
❌
❌